Pioneer DV-610AV-K Operating Instructions
D VD Pla yer D V -610A V -S D V -610A V -K Operating Instructions DV610AV_IBD_ EN.book 1 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
2 En Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly . After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (ser vicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. CAUTION: TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE P ARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN IMPOR T ANT D3-4-2-1-1_En-A CAUTION This product is a class 1 laser product, but this product contains a laser diode higher than Class 1. T o ensure continued safety , do not remove any covers or attempt to gain access to the inside of the product. Refer all servicing to qualified personnel. The following caution label appears on your unit. Location: inside of the unit CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT D3-4-2-1-8_B_En Singapore and T aiwanese model only W ARNING This equipment is not waterproof. T o prevent a fire or shock hazard, do not place any container filled with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain or moisture. D3-4-2-1-3_B_En W ARNING The voltage of the available power supply differs according to country or r egion. Be sure that the power supply voltage of the area wher e this unit will be used meets the requir ed voltage (e.g., 230 V or 120 V) written on the rear panel. D3-4-2-1-4_A_En Before plugging in for the first time, read the following section carefully . Operating Environment Operating environment temperature and humidity : 5 úC to 35 úC ( 41 úF to 95 úF); less than 85 %RH (cooling vents not blocked) Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or strong artificial light) D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En W ARNING T o pr event a fire hazard, do not place any naked flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the equipment. D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En VENTILA TION CAUTION When installing this unit, make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to impr ove heat radiation (at least 10 cm at top, 10 cm at rear , and 10 cm at each side). W ARNING Slots and openings in the cabinet are pr ovided for ventilation to ensure r eliable operation of the product, and to pr otect it from overheating. T o prevent fir e hazard, the openings should never be blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the equipment on thick carpet or a bed. D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En DV610AV_IBD_ EN.book 2 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
3 En NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to P art 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful inter ference to radio communications. However , there is no guarantee that inter ference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful inter ference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the inter ference by one or more of the following measures: â Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. â Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver . â Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. â Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. D8-10-1-2_En CAUTION: This product satisfies FCC regulations when shielded cables and connectors are used to connect the unit to other equipment. T o prevent electromagnetic inter ference with electric appliances such as radios and televisions, use shielded cables and connectors for connections. D8-10-3a_En Information to User Alteration or modifications carried out without appropriate authorization may invalidate the user âÂÂs right to operate the equipment. D8-10-2_En CAUTION : USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MA Y RESUL T IN HAZARDOUS RADIA TION EXPOSURE. CAUTION : THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL INCREASE EYE HAZARD. D6-8-2-1_En If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be per formed only by qualified ser vice personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make sure it is properly disposed of after removal. The equipment should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En CAUTION The î ST ANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not completely shut off all power from the AC outlet. Since the power cord ser ves as the main disconnect device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from the AC outlet to shut down all power . Therefore, make sure the unit has been installed so that the power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in case of an accident. T o avoid fire hazard, the power cord should also be unplugged from the AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En This product is for general household purposes. Any failure due to use for other than household purposes (such as long-term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires repair will be charged for even during the warranty period. K041_En POWER-CORD CAUTION Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cords. The power cords should be routed such that they are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check the power cord once in a while. When you find it damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized ser vice center or your dealer for a replacement. S002_En This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. This product includes F ontAv enue î f onts licenced by NEC Cor poration. F ontA venue is a registered trademark of NEC Cor poration. For Australia Model For T aiwan exclusively T aiwanese two pin flat-bladed plug K056_En DV610AV_IBD_ EN.book 3 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
4 En Contents 01 Before you start Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 WhatâÂÂs in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Hints on in stalla tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Disc/content format playba ck compatib ility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 02 Connections Easy connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Connecting using the S-Video output . . . . 11 Connecting using the componen t video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Connecting to an AV receiver . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 03 Controls and displays Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Remote cont rol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 04 Getti ng start ed Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Using the on-screen displays . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Setting up the player for your TV . . . . . . . . 1 9 Setting the language of this playerâÂÂs on-screen displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Playing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 05 Playing discs Scanni ng discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Playing in slow motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Frame advance/frame reverse . . . . . . . . . . 24 Viewing a JPEG slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Browsing Discs with the Disc Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 5 Browsing Files with the Disc Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 6 Looping a se ction of a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Using repeat play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Using random play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Creating a pro gram list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Searchi ng a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Switching subtit les . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Switching audio language/channels . . . . . 31 Zooming the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1 Switc hing cam era angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Displaying disc information . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 06 USB playback Using the USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Recording the tracks of a music CD on a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 07 Audio Settings and Video Adjust menus Audio Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Video Adjust menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 08 Initial Settings menu Using the Initial Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . 37 Digital Audio Out settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Video Output settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Language settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Display settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Options settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Parent al Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 DTS Down mix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 About DivXî VOD content . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Speakers settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 HDMI output with DVD-Audio an d SACD sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 09 Additional information Taking care of your player an d discs . . . . . . 50 Screen sizes and disc formats . . . . . . . . . . 51 Setting the TV system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Resetting the player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 DVD-Video re gions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Selecting languages using th e language code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Language code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Country/Area code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Specific ations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 DV610AV_IBD_ EN.book 4 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
01 5 En Chapter 1 Before you start Features ⢠PureCinema Prog ressive Scan video When connected to a progressive scan-compatible TV or monitor using the component video ou tputs, you can enjoy extremely stable, flicker free images, with the same frame refresh rate as the original movie. ⢠24-bi t/192 kHz compati ble DA C The on-board 24-bit/192 kHz DAC mean s that this player is fully co mpatible w ith high sampling -rate discs , capable of deliverin g exceptional sound qu ality in terms of dyn amic range, low-level resolution and high-fr equency detail. WhatâÂÂs i n the box Please confirm that the following accessories are in the box when you open it. ⢠Remote control ⢠AA/R6P dry cell batteries x 2 ⢠Audio/video cable (r ed/white/yellow plugs) ⢠Power cable ( Central American, South American and Taiwan model x2) ⢠Operating instructions x 2 ( Australian, Thailand and PX model x 1) ⢠Front panel button names stic ker ( Taiwan mode ls on ly ) â Chine se languag e button names for the front p anel controls. ⢠Remote control overla y ( Taiw an mod els only ) â Place the overla y on the remote control to be able to read the b uttons i n Chin ese. Putting the batteries in the remote ⢠Open the battery compartment cover and insert the batteries as shown. Use two AA/R6P batteries and follow the indications ( ï« , ïª ) inside the compartment. Close the cover when yo uâÂÂre finished. When closing the cove r, align the notch and tab, and slide in the direction indicated by the arrow ï² . Important Incorrect use o f batteries can result in hazards such as leakage and bursting. Please observe the followin g: ⢠DonâÂÂt mix new and old batterie s together . ⢠DonâÂÂt use differen t kinds of battery together â although they may look similar, different batteries may have different voltages. ⢠Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each battery match the indications in the battery compartme nt. ⢠Remove batteries from equipmen t that isnâÂÂt going to be used for a month or more. ⢠When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental pub lic instruc tionâÂÂs rules that apply in your country/are a. DV610AV_IBD_ EN.book 5 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
01 6 En ⢠Do not use or store batterie s in direct sunlight or other ex cessively hot place, such as inside a car or near a heater. This can cause ba tteries to leak, overhea t, explode or ca tch fire. It can a lso reduce the life or performance of batteries. Hints on installation We want you to enjo y using this product f or years to come, so please use the following guidelines when choo sing a su itable loc ation: Do... ⢠Use in a w ell-ventila ted r oom. ⢠Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table, shelf or stereo rack. DonâÂÂt... ⢠Use in a place ex posed to high temperatures or humid ity, includ ing near radiators and other heat-generating appliances. ⢠Place on a window sill or a place where th e player will be exposed to direct sunlight. ⢠Use in an exce ssively dusty or damp environment. ⢠Place directly on top of a n am plifier, or other component in your stereo system that becomes hot in use. ⢠Use near a television or mon itor as you may experience interference â especially if the television uses an in door antenna. ⢠Use in a kitchen or oth er room where the player may be exposed to smoke or steam. ⢠Use on a thick rug or carp et, or cover with cloth â this may prevent proper cooling of the unit. ⢠Place on an unstable sur face, or one that is not la rge enough to suppo rt all four of the unitâÂÂs feet. Disc/content format playba ck compatibility This player is compati ble with a wide range of disc types (m edia) and formats. Playable disc s will generally feature one of the following logo s on the disc and/or disc packaging. Note however that some disc types, such as record able CD and DVD, may be in an unplayable forma t â see below for further compatib ility info rmation. Please also no te that recordable discs canno t be recorded using this player. ⢠This unit wi ll play DVD R/ RW discs. ⢠is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Co rporation. ⢠is a trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation. ⢠Also compatib le with KODAK Picture CD. DVD- Video DVD -R DVD-RW DVD-Audio Video CD Audio CD CD-R CD-RW Su pe r Audio CD F ujicolo r CD DV610AV_IBD_ EN.book 6 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
01 7 En This player supp orts the IECâÂÂs Super VCD standard. Compared to the Video C D standard, Super VCD offers superior p icture quality, and a llows two stereo soundtracks to be recorded. Super VCD also supp orts the widescreen size. About DualDisc p layback A DualDisc is a new two -sided disc, one side of which contains DVD co ntent video, audio, etc. while th e other side contain s non-DVD content such as digital audio material. The non-DV D, audio si de of the disc is not compliant with the CD audio specif ication and therefore may no t play. The DVD side of a Dual Disc plays in this product. For more detailed information on the DualDisc specification, please refer to the disc manufacturer or disc retailer. CD-R/-RW compatibility â¢C o m p a t i b l e f o r m a t s : CD audio, Video CD/ Super VCD, ISO 9660 CD-ROM* containing MP3, WMA , MPEG-4 AAC, JPEG or Div X video/WMV files * ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 c ompliant. CD physical fo rmat: Mode1, Mode2 XA Form1. Romeo and Jo liet file system s are both compat ible with this pl ayer. ⢠Multi -session pl ayback: No ⢠Unfinalized disc playback: No ⢠File structure (may differ): Up to 299 folders on a disc; up to 648 folders and files (combined) within each folder DVD R/ RW compatib ility Only DVD R/DVD RW discs reco rded in âÂÂVideo Mode (DVD Video Mode)â which have been finalized, can be played back. Howeve r, some editing made during the recording may not be played back accurately. DVD-R/- RW compatib ility ⢠Compatible formats: DVD-Video, Video Recordi ng (VR )* * Edit po ints may not pl ay exactly as edited; screen may go momentarily blank at edited points. ⢠Unfinalized p layback: No ⢠MP3/WMA/MP EG-4 AAC/JPEG or DivX video/WMV file playba ck on DVD-R/ -RW: Yes ⢠This label indic ates playback compatibil ity with DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode (Vid eo Recor ding format). However, for discs recorded with a record- only-once encrypted program, playback can only be achieved using a CPRM compatible devi ce. Compressed audio compatibility ⢠Compatible forma ts: MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3), Windows Media Audio (WMA), MPEG-4 AAC ⢠Sampling rates: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz ⢠Bit-rates: Any (128 kbps or higher recommended) ⢠VBR (Variable Bit Rate) MP3/WM A/ MPEG-4 AAC playback: No ⢠WMA lossless enco ding compatible: No ⢠DRM (Digital Rights Management) compatible: No (DRM-protected audio fil es will not play in this player â see also DRM in the Glossary o n page 58) ⢠File extensions: .mp3, .wma, .m4a (these must be used for the player to recognize MP3, WMA an d MPEG-4 A AC files â do not use for other file types) Su pe r VCD DV610AV_IBD_ EN.book 7 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
01 8 En About MPEG-4 AAC Advanced Audio Coding (AAC) is at the core of the MPEG-4 AAC standard, wh ich incor porates MP EG-2 AAC, fo rming the basi s of the MPEG -4 audio comp ression technology. The file format and ext ension used dep end on the applic ation used to encode the AAC file. This unit plays back AAC files enco ded by iTunes î bearing the extension âÂÂ. m4aâÂÂ. DRM-protected files will not play, and fil es encoded with some versions of iTunes î may not play, or filenames may display in correctly. ⢠Apple and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc., registe red in the U. S. and other countries. Windows Media⢠Audio (WMA) compatibility This player can playback WMA content. WMA is an acronym fo r Windows Media Audio and refers to an a udio compr ession technolo gy developed by Micr osoft Corporation. WMA content can be encoded by using Windows Media Player for Wi nd ows XP, Windows Media Player 9 or Windows Media Pla yer 10 series. ⢠Windows Media is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation. ⢠This product include s technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and cann ot be used or distribute d without a license from Microsoft Li censing, Inc. About DivX video DivX is a media te chnology cre ated by DivX, Inc. DivX media files c ontain not only video but also includ e advanced media features l ike menus, subtitles, and alternate audiotracks. This player can play Di vX videos recorded on DVDs, CDs, or USB stora ge devices. Keeping the same terminology as DVD-Video, individual DivX video file s are ca lled âÂÂT itlesâÂÂ. DivX videos will be pl ayed in alphab etical order. ⢠DivX, DivX Ultra Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under l icense. Displaying externa l subtitle files The font sets listed below ar e available for external subtitle f iles. Yo u can se e the pr oper font set on-screen by setting the Subtitle Language (in Language setting s on pa ge 40) to match th e subtitle f ile. This player supports the foll owing language groups: ⢠Some external subtitle files may be displayed incorrectly or not at all. Group 1 Albanian (sq), Basque (eu), Catalan (ca), Danish (da), Dut ch (nl), English (en), F aroese (fo), F innish (fi), F rench (fr), German (de), Icelandic (is), Irish (ga), Italian (it), Norwegian (no), P ortuguese (pt), Rhaeto-Romanic (rm), Scottish (gd), S panish (es) , Swedish (s v) Group 2 Albanian (sq), Croatian (hr), Czech (cs), Hungarian (hu), P olish (pl), Romanian (ro), Slovak (sk), Slovenian (sl) Group 3 Bulgarian (bg), Byelorussian (be), Macedonian (mk), Russian (ru), Serbian (sr), Ukrainian (u k) Group 4 Hebrew (iw), Yiddish (ji) Group 5 T urkish (tr) DV610AV_IBD_ EN.book 8 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
01 9 En ⢠For externa l subtitle f iles th e followin g subtitle format fi lename extensions are supported (please note that these files are not show n within the dis c naviga tion menu): .srt, .sub, .ssa, .smi ⢠The filename of the movie file h as to be repeated at the beginning of the filename for the external subtitle file. ⢠The number of ex ternal subtitle files which can be switched for the same movie file is limited to a maximum of 10. DivX video compatibil ity ⢠Officia l DivX î Ultra Certified produc t. ⢠Plays all versions of DivX î video (including DivX î 6) with enhanced playback of DivX î media file s and the DivX î Media Fo rmat. ⢠File extensions: .avi and .divx (these mu st be used for the player to recognize DivX video files). Note that all files with the .avi extension are rec ognized as MPEG4, but not all of these are necessarily DivX video files and therefor e may not be playable on this player. About Windows Media Vid eo (WMV) WMV is an acronym for Windows Media Video and refers to a video comp ression technolo gy developed by Micr osoft Corporation. WMV content can be encoded by using Windows Media Encoder. ⢠This play er is compat ible with W MV9 files that are encoded by using the Windows Media Encoder 9 Ser ies, with .wmv as an extension. ⢠Compatible with size under 720x4 80 pixels/ 720x576 pixels. ⢠Advanced Profile is not supp orted. ⢠DRM-protec ted video files will not play in this player. JPEG file co mpatibility ⢠Compatible formats: Basel ine JPEG and EXIF 2.2* still image fi les up to a resolution of 3072 x 2048. * File form at used by di gital still c ameras. ⢠Progressive JPEG compatible: No ⢠File extension s: .jpg (mus t be u sed for the player to recognize J PEG files â do not use for other file types) PC-created disc compatibility Discs re corded usi ng a person al computer may not be playabl e in this un it due t o the setting of the application soft ware used to create the disc. In these particula r instances, check with the software publisher for more detailed information. Discs recorded in packet write mode (UD F format) are not c ompatible with this player. Check the DVD-R/-RW or CD-R/-RW software disc boxes for additi onal compatibility information. DV610AV_IBD_ EN.book 9 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
02 10 En Chapter 2 Connections Easy connections Important ⢠Before making or changing any connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cable from the AC outlet. ⢠The setup described here is a basic setup that al lows you to pl ay discs using just the cables supplied with the player. In this setup, stereo au dio is played through the speakers in your TV. ⢠This player is equipped with copy protection technology. Do not connect this player to your TV via a VCR using audio/video cables, as the pict ure from this player will not appear properly on your TV. (Th is player may also no t be comp atible with some combinat ion TV/VCRs f or the same reason; refer to the m anufacturer f or more information.) 1 Connect the VIDEO OUT and AUDIO OUT L/R jacks to a set of A/V inputs on your TV. Use the supplied audio/video cabl e, connecting the red and white plugs to the audio outputs and the yellow plug to the video output. Make sure you m atch up the left a nd right audio outputs with th eir correspon ding inputs for correc t stereo sound. See below if you want to use a compo nent, S-Video cable for the video co nnection. 2 Connect the suppli ed AC power cable to the AC IN in let, then plug into a power outlet. Note ⢠Before unplug ging the player from the power outlet, make sure you first switch it into standby using eith er the front panel ïµ STANDBY/ON button, or the remote control, and wait of the -OFF- message to disappear from the playerâÂÂs display. ⢠For the above reason s, do not plug this player into a switche d power supply found on some amplifiers and AV receiver s. AC IN DIGITAL AUDIO OUT OPTICAL COAXIAL P R P B Y COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) SL SR HDMI OUT SW C L R To audio/video inputs To power outlet Y ellow White Red TV DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 10 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
02 11 En Connecting using the S-Video output If your TV (or other equipment) has an S -Video (S1) input, you can use the S-Video output on this player instead of the standard (composite) output for a better quality picture. ⢠Use an S-Video cabl e (not supplied) to connect the S-VIDEO OUT to an S-Video input on your TV (or mo nitor or AV receiver). Line up the small triangle above the jack with th e s a m e ma r k o n th e p l u g b e f o r e p l u g g i n g i n . Connecting using the component video output You can use the co mponent video output instead of the standard video out jack to connect this player to your TV (or other equipm ent). This s hould give you the be st quality picture from the th ree types of video output av ailable. ⢠Use a component vide o cable (not supplied) to conn ect the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks to a component video input on you r TV, monitor or AV receiver. Watching progressive scan video from the component video outputs This player can output progressive scan video from the co mponent vi deo output. Compared to interlace video, pro gressive scan video effectively doubles the scan ning rate of the picture, resulting in a very stable, flicker-free image. To set up the player fo r use with a progressive scan TV, see Video Output settings on page 39. When the player is set to output pro gressive scan video, the PRGSVE indicat or ligh ts in the front p anel dis play. P R P B Y COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) SL SR HDMI OUT SW C L R TV To S-Video input P R P B Y COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) SL SR HDMI OUT SW C L R TV To component video input DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 11 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
02 12 En Important ⢠If you con nect a TV tha t is not c ompatible with a progressive scan signal and switch the player to progressive, yo u will not be able to see any pi cture at all. In th is case, switch everything off and reco nnect using the supplied video cable (see Easy connections on page 10), then switch back to Interlace (see below). Switching the video output to int erlace using the front panel c ontrols Switch the player to standby then, using the front p anel control s, press ïµ STA NDBY/ON while pressing ï¯ to switch the player back to Interlace . ⢠If the player is connected using HDMI, disconnect the HDMI cable before resetting the player to interl ace output. (If left connected, the HDMI output resolution will be reset to its defaul t â see Resetting the output resolution to the default setting with HDMI connection on page 15.) Connecting to an AV receiver You can connec t this player to your AV receiver using the multicha nnel analog outp uts or one of the dig ital outputs. In addition to these connections, you sho uld also connect the 2 cha nnel analog o utputs for compat ibility w ith all d iscs. YouâÂÂll probably also want to connect a video output to your AV receiver. You can use any of the video outputs available on this player (the illustration shows a st andard (composite) connectio n). 1 Connect the anal og AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) FRONT L/R and VIDEO OU T jacks on this player to a set of analog aud io and video inputs o n your AV receive r. 2 Connect the AV receive râÂÂs video output to a video inpu t on your TV. You can also use the S-Video or c omponent video jacks to connect to the AV re ceiver if you prefer. Tip ⢠You usually have to connect the same kind of video cable be tween your DVD pla yer and AV receiver, and between your AV receiver and TV. HDMI STANDBY/ON ïµ STANDBY/ON ï¯ P R P B Y COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) SL SR HDMI OUT SW C L R AV r eceiver To audio/video inputs DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 12 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
02 13 En Connecting the multichannel analog outputs If your AV rece iver has 5.1 channel analo g inputs, we recommend co nnecting this player to it usi ng the mul tichannel a nalog ou tputs. Doing this will ensure that you can enjoy all kinds of disc, including Dol by Digital and DTS DVD-Video discs, as well as high sampling rate and multic hannel DVD-Audio and SAC D discs. ⢠Connect the multi -channel audio outputs on this player to the mul ti-channel audio inputs on your AV receiver. ItâÂÂs convenient to use three stereo audio cables; one for the FRO NT , one fo r the SURROUN D and one f or the CENTER and SUBWOOFER channe ls. You can also use the S-Video or compo nent video jacks to connect to th e AV receiver if you prefer. Tip ⢠After connect ing up and switching on, yo u should change the Audio Output Mode setting in the Initial Setup menu from the default 2 Channel to 5.1 Chan nel . See also Audio Output Mo de on page 44. Connecting the digital output This pl ayer has both o ptical and coaxial-t ype digital audio outp uts for connection to an AV receiver. Connect whichever is co nvenient. Depending on the capabilities of you r AV receiver, you might have to set up th is player to output o nly digi tal audio in a comp atible format . See Digital Audio O ut settings on page 38 and refer to the op erating instructions that came with yo ur AV receiver. Note that SACD au dio is not output through these jacks , so this co nnection shou ld be in additi on to, rather than ins tead of, a 5 .1 channel analo g connection. ⢠Connect one of the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jacks on this play er to a digital input on your AV recei ver. For an optical conn ection, use an optical ca ble (not supplied) to connect the OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT ja ck to an optic al input on your AV receiver. For a co axial connec tion, use a coa xial cabl e (similar to the supplied video cable) to connect the COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO O UT jack to a coaxial i nput on yo ur AV receiver. P R P B Y COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) SL SR HDMI OUT SW C L R AV r eceiver To multi-channel audio inputs AC IN DIGITAL AUDIO OUT OPTICAL COAXIAL AV r eceiver To coaxial/optical digital input DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 13 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
02 14 En Connecting using HDMI If you have a HDMI equipped monitor or display, you can connect it to this player using a commercial ly available HDMI cable. The HDMI connect or outputs uncompressed digital video, as well as almo st every kind of digital audio that the pla yer is com patible with, including DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, SAC D, Video CD/Su per VCD, CD, WMA, MP3, MPEG-4 AAC, DivX video and WMV. ⢠Use an HDMI cable (not supp lied) to connect the HDMI OUT interconnect on this play er to an HDMI in terconnect on a HDMI-compatible display. The arrow on the cable connector body sho uld be face up for correct alignment wit h the connector on the player . Note ⢠This unit has been designed to be compliant with HDMI (Hig h-Definition Multimedi a Interface). Dep ending on the component you h ave connected, using a DVI connecti on may result in unrelia ble signal transfers. ⢠When you change the compon ent connected to the HDMI output, you will also need to change the HDMI se ttings to match the new compo nent (see HDMI Out on page 38, HDM I Resolution on page 39 and HDMI Color on page 39 to do this). However, the settings for each component are then stored in memory (for up to 2 componen ts). ⢠The HDMI connection is compatib le with 2 channel li near PCM sign als (44.1 kHz to 192 kHz, 16 bit/20 bit/24 bit), and Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG audio bit stream, multi channel DS D, and mult i channel li near PCM signals, (5.1 channel signals up to 96 kHz, 16 bit/20 bit/24 bit). â Manufactured unde r license from Dol by Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, and the double-D symbo l are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. â Manufactured unde r license under U.S. Patent #âÂÂs: 5,451 ,942; 5,956,674; 5 ,974,380; 5,978,76 2; 6,226,616; 6,487 ,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registered trademarks and the DTS logos, Symbol and DTS 96/24 are trademarks of DTS, Inc. é 1996-200 7 DTS, Inc. All Rights R eserved. P R P B Y COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) SL SR HDMI OUT SW C L R HDMI-compatible display To HDMI interconnect DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 14 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
02 15 En About HD MI HDMI (Hi gh-Definit ion Mult imedia I nterface) supports both video an d audio on a sin gle digital connection for use with DVD players, DTV, set-top boxes, and other AV devices. HDMI was developed to provide the technologies of High-b andwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP) a s well as Di gital Visual Interface (DVI) in one specification . HDCP is u sed to protect di gital con tent transmitted and received by DVI-compliant displays. HDMI has the capability to support standard, enhanced, or high-defin ition video plus standard to multi-channel surround-so und audio. HDMI features include unco mpressed digital video, a bandwidth of up to fi ve gigaby tes per se cond (w ith HDT V signal s), one connector (instead of several cables and connectors), and communication between the AV source and AV devices such as DTVs. ⢠HDMI, the HD MI Logo and High-Definitio n Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered t rademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. Resetting the output r esolution to the default sett ing with HDMI connectio n Switch the player to standby then, using the front p anel control s, press ïµ STA NDBY/ON while pressing ï¯ to switch the player back to 720x480p (NTSC)/72 0x576p (PAL) . HDMI STANDBY/ON ïµ STANDBY/ON ï¯ DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 15 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
03 16 En Chapter 3 Controls and displays Front panel 1 ïµ STANDBY/ON (page 18) 2 Disc tray 3 ï¨ OPEN/CLOSE (page 20) 4D i s p l a y 5T O P M E N U (page 22) 6 ENTER & cursor buttons (page 18) 7M E N U (page 22) 8 RETURN (page 22) 9H O M E M E N U (page 18) 10 USB port (Type A) (page 32) 11 DVD/USB (page 32) 12 ï¤ (page 21) 13 ïÂÂ¥ (page 21) 14 ï§ (page 21) 15 ï¯ and ï° (page 21) 16 HDMI indicator Lights when this pla yer is recognized by another HDMl or DVI/HD CP compatible component. ï¨ î OPEN/CLOSE HDMI HOME MENU RETURN ENTER TOP MENU MENU USB DVD/USB STANDBY/ON 2 5 3 4 6 7 1 9 8 10 12 11 16 13 14 15 DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 16 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
03 17 En Remote control 1 ïµ STANDBY/ON (page 18) 2 AUDIO (page 31) 3 SUBTITL E (page 30) 4 Number buttons (page 21) 5T O P M E N U (page 22) 6 ENTER & cursor buttons (page 18) 7H O M E M E N U (page 18) 8 ï and ï±/ (pages 21 and 23) 9 ï¤ PLAY (page 21) 10 ï¯ PREV (page 21) 11 ïÂÂ¥ PAUS E (page 21) 12 USB REC (page 33) 13 PLAY MO DE (page 27) 14 ï¨ OPEN/CLOSE (pa ge 20) 15 ANGLE (pa ge 31) 16 DVD/USB (page 32) 17 CLEAR (page 29) 18 MENU (page 22) 19 RETURN (page 18) 20 ï® and /ï² (pages 21 and 23) 21 ï° NEXT (page 21) 22 ï§ STOP (page 21) 23 DISPLAY (page 31) 24 ZOOM (page 31) Using the remote control Keep in mind the following when using the remote co ntrol: ⢠Make su re that th ere are no obs tacles between the remo te and the remote sensor on the unit. ⢠The r emote has a ra nge of about 7 m. ⢠Remote operat ion may become unreliable if strong sunlight or fluorescent li ght is shining o n the unitâÂÂs remote se nsor. ⢠Remote controllers for different devices can interfere with each other. Avoid using remotes for other equipment loca ted close to this un it. ⢠Replace th e batteries when you notice a fall off in the ope rating range of the remote. ST ANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE 1 23 CLEAR USB DVD/ 4 5 6 7 89 0 TOP MENU MENU ENTER RETURN PLAY MODE ZOOM DISPLAY PLAY PREV PA USE DVD STOP NEXT HOME MENU REC USB 1 23 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 2 4 5 6 7 8 10 12 13 3 9 11 22 24 DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 17 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
04 18 En Chapter 4 Getting started Switching on After making sure that everything is connected properly and th at the player is plugged in, press ïµ STANDBY/ON on the front pa nel or remote control to switch the player on . Also, switch on your TV a nd make sure that it is set to the input you connected the DVD player to. FAQ ⢠My DVD play er switches on but the re is nothing disp layed on my TV. Make sure th at the TV is set to the correc t video input (not a TV channel ). For example, if you conne cted this player to the VIDEO 1 inputs on your TV, switc h your TV to VIDEO 1 . Note ⢠This player features a screen saver an d an auto power of f function. If the p layer is stopped and no button is pressed for around five minutes, the screen saver starts. If the disc tray is c losed but no disc is playing and no con trol is pr essed for about 30 minutes, the player automatically goes into standby. Using the on-screen displays For ease of use, this player ma kes extensive use of graphical on-screen displays (OSDs). All the scree ns are navigate d in basically th e same way, using the cursor buttons ( ï©/ïª /ï«/ ï¬ ) to change th e highlighted item and pressing ENTE R to se lect it. Note ⢠From here on in this m anual, the word âÂÂselectâ generally me ans use the cursor buttons to high light an item on-screen , then press ENT ER . HDMI STANDBY/ON ïµ STANDBY/ON Button What it does HOME ME NU Display/exit the on-screen display . ï©/ïª/ï«/ï¬ Changes the highlighted menu item. ENTER Selects the highlighted menu item. RETURN R eturns to the main menu without saving changes. TOP MENU MENU ENTER RETURN HOME MENU ï¨ î OPEN/CLOSE HOME MENU RETURN ENTER TOP MENU MENU USB DVD/USB ENTER HOME MENU RETURN DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 18 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
04 19 En Setting up the player for your TV If you have a wide screen (16:9) TV, you should setup the player so that the picture will be presented correctly. If you have a convention al (4:3) TV, you can leave the player on the default setting and move on to the next section . 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂInitial SettingsâÂÂ. 2 Select â TV Screenâ from the âÂÂVideo Outputâ settings. 3 If you have a wid escreen (16:9) TV, select âÂÂ16: 9 (Wide)â or âÂÂ16:9 (Compressed)âÂÂ. If you have a con ventional (4:3) TV, you can change the setting from 4:3 (Letter Box) to 4:3 (Pan & Scan) if you prefer. See Vide o Output settings on page 39 for more details. 4 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu screen. Setting the language of this playerâÂÂs on-screen displa ys This sets the language of the playerâÂÂs on-screen displays. 1 Press HOM E MENU and sel ect âÂÂInitial SettingsâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂOSD Languageâ from the âÂÂDisplayâ s ettings. Taiwanese model only: 3 Select a language. The on-sc reen langua ge will chan ge accordin g to your selection. 4 Press HOME MEN U to exit the menu screen. Initial Settings Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers TV Screen Component Out HDMI Resolution HDMI Color 4:3 (Letter Box) 4:3 (Pan&Scan) 16:9 (Wide) 16:9 (Compressed) Initial Settings Initial Settings Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers OSD Language Angle Indicator Initial Settings English français Español Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers OSD Language Angle Indicator Initial Settings English DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 19 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
04 20 En Playing discs The basic playba ck controls for playing DVD, SACD, CD, Video CD/Super VCD, DivX video/ WMV and MP3/WMA/M PEG-4 AAC discs are covered here. Further fun ctions are detailed in the next cha pter. For details on playing JPEG picture discs, see Viewing a JPE G slides how on page 24. Important ⢠Throughout this manual, the term âÂÂDVDâ means DVD-Video, DVD-Audio and DVD-R/-RW. If a fun ction is specific to a particula r kind of D VD disc, it is specifi ed. 1 If the player isnâÂÂt alread y on, press ïµ STANDBY/ON to switch it o n. If youâÂÂre playin g a DVD, disc con taining DivX video/WMV files or Video CD/Super VCD, a l s o t u r n o n y o u r T V a n d m a k e s u r e t h a t i t i s s e t to the correc t video inp ut. 2 Press ï¨ OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray. 3 Load a disc. Load a disc with the label side facing up, us ing the disc tray guide to a lign the disc (if yo uâÂÂre loading a double -sided DVD disc, load it with the side you want to play fac e down). 4 Press ï¤ PLAY to start playb ack. If youâ re playin g a DVD or Vid eo CD/ Super VCD, a n on-screen m enu may appear. See DVD and DivX d isc menus and Video C D/ Super VCD PBC menus o n p a g e 2 2 f o r m o r e o n how to nav igate thes e. ⢠If youâÂÂre playin g a containin g DivX video/ WMV files or MP3/WMA /MPEG-4 AAC audio files, it may take a few seconds before playback sta rts, etc. This is normal. ⢠Please see About DualDisc playback on page 7 if you want to play a DualDisc (DVD/ CD hybrid disc) . Note ⢠You may find with some DVD discs that some playback controls donâÂÂt work in certain parts of the dis c. This is n ot a malfunction. ⢠If a di sc contains a mi xture of movi e (DivX video/W MV) and other m edia file types (MP3, for example), first select whether to play the movie files ( DivX/ WMV ) or the other media file types ( MP3/ WMA/MPEG4 AAC/JPEG ) from the on-screen display. STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE 1 23 CLEAR USB DVD/ 4 5 6 7 89 0 TOP MENU MENU ENTER RETURN PLAY MODE ZOOM DISPLAY PLAY PREV PAUSE DVD STOP NEXT HOME MENU AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE REC USB DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 20 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
04 21 En Basic playback controls The table below shows the basic controls on the remote for playin g discs. The foll owing chapter covers other playback f eatures in more deta il. Resume and Last M emory With the exception of DVD-Audio and SACD discs, when you stop playback of a DVD, CD, or Video CD/Super VCD or D ivX video/WMV discs, RESUME is shown i n the disp lay indicating that you can resume playbac k again from that poi nt. If the di sc tray is not opened, the next time you start playback the display shows RESUME and playback resumes from the resume point. (If you want to clear the resume point, press ï§ STOP w hile RESUME is displayed.) With DVDs and Video C D/Super VCDs, if you take the disc out of the player after stopping playback, th e last play po sition is stored in memory. If the next disc you load is the sam e one, the display shows LAST MEM and playback will resume. For DVD-Video discs, the player stores the play position of the last five discs. When one of these discs is next loaded, you can r esume play back. Note ⢠The Last Memory func tion doesnâÂÂt work with VR format DVD-R/-RW, DVD-Audio or SACD discs. ⢠If you donâÂÂt need the Last Memory function when you stop a disc, you can press ï¨ OPEN/CLOSE to stop playbac k and open the disc tray. Button What it does ï¤ PLAY Star ts playback. If the display shows RESUME or LAST MEM playback starts from the resume or last memor y point (see also Resume and Last Memory below.) ïÂÂ¥ PAUSE P auses a dis c thatâÂÂs playing, or restarts a paused disc. ï§ STOP Stops playback. See also Resume and Last Memory below. ï (remote only) P ress to start fast reverse scanning. P ress ï¤ PLAY to resume normal playback. ï® (remote only) P ress to start fast forward scanning. P ress ï¤ PLAY to resume normal playback. ï¯ PREV Skips to the start of the current track, title or chapter , then to previous tracks/titles/chapters. ï° NEXT Skips to the next track, title or chapter . Numbers (remote only) Use to enter a title/chapter/ track number . P ress ENTER to select. ⢠If the disc is stopped, playback starts from the selected title (for DVD), group (DVD-Audio) or tr ack (for CD/ Vid eo CD /Super VCD ). ⢠If the disc is playing, playback jumps to the start of the selected title (VR mode DVD-RW), chapter (DVD-Video) or track (DVD -Audio*/SACD/ CD/Video CD/Super VCD). *within the current group DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 21 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
04 22 En DVD and DivX disc menus Some DivX medi a files and many DVD-Vi deo and DVD-Audio discs feat ure menus from which you can select what you want to watch. They may also give a ccess to additional features, such as subtit le and audio language selection, or specia l features such as slideshow s. See the di sc packag ing for deta ils. Sometimes DivX and DVD menus are displayed automatically when yo u start playback; others onl y appear when you press MENU or TOP MENU . Important ⢠Some DVD-Audio discs feature a âÂÂbonus groupâÂÂ. To play this g roup you first ha ve to input a password, which you can find on the discâÂÂs packaging. Use the number buttons to input the password. Video CD/Super VCD PBC menus Some Video CD/Super VCDs have menus from which you can choo se what you want to watch. These are called PBC (Playback Co ntrol) menus. You can play a P BC Video CD/Su per VCD without h aving to navigate th e PBC men u by starting playback using a number button to select a t rack, rather than the ï¤ PLAY button. Button What it does TOP MENU Displays the âÂÂtop menuâ of a DVD disc â this varies with the disc. MENU Displays a DVD disc (or Di vX media files) menu â this varies with the disc and may be the same as the âÂÂtop menuâÂÂ. ï©/ïª/ï«/ï¬ Moves the cursor around the screen. ENTER Selects the current menu option. 1 23 CLEAR USB DVD/ 4 5 6 7 89 0 TOP MENU MENU ENTER RETURN HOME MENU RETURN R eturns to the previously displayed menu screen. On some DVD-Audio discs featuring browsable pictures, press to display the browser screen. Numbers (remote only) Highlights a numbered menu option (some discs only). P ress ENTER to select. Button What it does RETURN Displays the PBC menu. Numbers (remote only) Use to enter a numbered m enu option . Pr ess ENTER to select. ï¯ PREV Displays the previous menu page (if there is one). ï° NEXT Displays the next menu page (if there is one). Button What it does 1 23 CLEAR USB DVD/ 4 5 6 7 89 0 TOP MENU MENU ENTER RETURN PLAY PREV PAUSE STOP NEXT HOME MENU DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 22 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
05 23 En Chapter 5 Playing discs Note ⢠Many of the functions cove red in this chapter apply to DVD, SACD, Video CDs/ Super VCDs, CDs, D ivX video/WMV and MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC/JPEG discs, although the exact operation of some varies slightly wi th the kind of disc loaded. ⢠Some DVDs restrict the use of some functions (rando m or repeat, for exam ple) in some or all parts of the disc. This is not a malfunction . ⢠When playing Video CD/Super VCDs, some of the function s are not ava ilable during PBC playback. If you want to use them, start the disc playing using a number button to select a track. Scanning di scs You can fast-scan discs forward or backward at four different speeds (only one speed fo r DivX video/WMV). 1 During pl ayback, press ï or ï® to start scanning. ⢠There is no sound while scanning DVDs, DivX video/WMV and Video CD/ Super VCDs. 2 Press repeatedly to increase the scanning speed. ⢠The scanning speed is shown on-screen. 3 To resume normal playba ck, press ï¤ PLAY. ⢠When scanning a Video C D/Super VCD playing in PBC mode or a MP3/WMA/ MPEG-4 AAC trac k, playback automatically resumes at the en d or beginning of the track. ⢠Depending on the disc, n ormal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is rea ched on a DVD disc. Playing in slow motion You can play DVD-Videos and DVD-R/-RW at four different slow motion speeds, for wards and backwards. Video CD/Super VCDs and DivX video/WMV can be played at four different for ward slow mot ion speeds. 1 During playb ack, press ïÂÂ¥ PAUSE. 2 Press and hold ï±/ or /ï² until slow motion pl ayback starts. ⢠The slow motion speed is shown on-screen. ⢠There is no sound durin g slow motion playback. 3 Press repeatedly to change the slow motion speed. 4 To resume normal playb ack, press ï¤ PLAY. ⢠Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached. DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 23 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
05 24 En Frame advance/fra me reverse You can advance or back up DVD-Video and DVD-R/-RW discs frame-by-frame. With Video CD/Super VCDs and DivX video/W MV file you can only use frame advance. 1 During pl ayback, press ïÂÂ¥ PAUSE. 2P r e s s ï±/ or /ï² to reverse or advance a frame at a time. 3 To resume normal playba ck, press ï¤ PLAY. ⢠Depending on the disc, n ormal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached. Viewing a JPEG sl ideshow When the ï¤ PL AY button is pressed to play JPEG files on DVD, CD, or USB storage device, the slide show will begin from the first fold er or file recorded on the media . The player displays the pictures in each folder in alphabetical order. ⢠If the folder contains MP 3/WMA/ MPEG-4 AAC files, playback of the slideshow and MP3/WMA/MP EG-4 AAC file repeats. Durin g the audio playback, you can still use the skip ( ï¯ PREV/ ï° NEXT ), scan ( ïÂÂ/ï® ) and pause ( ïÂÂ¥ PAUSE ) function s. Pictures are automatically adjusted so th at they fill as much of the screen as possible (if the aspect ratio of the picture is differen t to your TV screen you may n otice black bars at the sides, or at the top and bottom of the screen). While the slideshow is running: Note ⢠T h e t i m e i t t a k e s f o r t h e p l a y e r t o l o a d a f i l e increase s with larg e file sizes . Button What it does ïÂÂ¥ PAUSE P auses the slideshow ; press again to restart. ï¯ PREV Displays the previous picture. ï° NEXT Displays the next picture. ï«/ï¬ P aus es the slideshow and rotates the displayed picture 90ú (counter) clockwise. (P ress ï¤ PLAY to restart slideshow .) ï©/ïª P aus es the slideshow and flips the displayed picture horizontally or vertically . (Press ï¤ PLAY to restart slideshow .) ZOOM P aus es the slideshow and zooms the picture. P ress again to toggle between 1x, 2x and 4x zoom. (P ress ï¤ PLAY to restart slideshow .) MENU Displays the Disc Navigator screen (see page 26). Button What it does DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 24 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
05 25 En Browsing Discs with the Disc Navigator Use the Disc Navi gator to browse through the contents of a DVD-Video, VR mode DVD-R/-RW or Video CD/Super VCD disc to find the part you want to play. Important ⢠You canâÂÂt use the Disc Navigator with Video CD/Super VCDs in PBC mode. 1 During play back, press HOME MEN U and select âÂÂDisc Navigatorâ from the on-screen menu. 2 Selec t a view option. The options av ailable de pend on the kind of disc loaded and wheth er the disc is playing or not, but include: ⢠Title â Titles from a DVD-Video disc. ⢠Chapter â Ch apters from the current t itle of a DVD-Vide o disc. ⢠Track â Tracks from a Video CD/ Super VCD disc. ⢠Time â Thumb nails from a Video CD/ Super VCD disc at 10 minute intervals. ⢠Original: Title â Original titles from a VR mode DVD-R/-RW disc. ⢠Play List: Title â Play List titles from a VR mode DVD-R/-RW disc. ⢠Original: Time â Thumbn ails from the Original content at 10 minute i ntervals. ⢠Play List: Time â Thumb nails from the Play List at 10 minute intervals. The screen shows up to six moving t humbnail images displayed one after another. To display the previous/next six thumbnails, press ï¯ PREV /ï° NEXT (you donâÂÂt have to wait for all th e thumbn ails to fi nish pla ying to display the previous/next page). 3 Select the th umbnail image for what you want to play. You can use either th e cursor buttons ( ï©/ïª/ ï«/ï¬ ) and ENTER to select a thumbnail, or the number buttons. To select using the number butto ns, enter a two-digit number then press ENTER . Tip ⢠Anot her way to fin d a particul ar place on a disc is to use one of the search modes. See Searching a disc on page 30. Disc Navigator Di sc Navigator Title Chapter 0 1 04 02 05 03 0 6 Di sc Navigator: Title 0 1 - 49: - - DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 25 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
05 26 En Browsing Files with the Disc Navigator The Disc Navigator ca n be used to pla y MP3, WMA, MEPG-4 AAC, DivX video, WMV and JPEG files. Use the Disc N avigator to find a particular file or folder by filename. Note that if there a re other types of files on the same disc, these will not be displayed in the Disc Navigator. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂDisc Navigatorâ from th e on-screen menu. 2 Use the cursor buttons ( ï©/ïª/ ï«/ï¬ ) and ENTER to navi gate. Use the cursor u p/down button s ( ï©/ïª ) to move up and down th e folder/file list. Use the cursor left button ( ï« ) to re turn to th e parent folder. Use ENTER or curso r right ( ï¬ ) to open a highlighted folder. ⢠You can also retu rn to the parent folder by going to the top of the list to the â .. â folder, then pressing ENTER . ⢠When a JPEG file is highlighted, a thumbnail image is displayed on the right. 3 To play th e highlighted track or DivX video/WMV fil e or display the highligh ted JPE G file, p ress EN TER. ⢠When a MP3/W MA/MPEG-4 A AC or DivX video/WMV file is selected, playba ck begins, starting with the selected fi le, and continues until the end o f the folder. ⢠When a JPEG file is selected, a sli deshow begins, s tarting wi th that fi le, and continues to th e end of the folder. Tip ⢠You can also play a JPEG slideshow while listening to MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC playback. Simply select the audio file you w a n t t o l i s t e n t o f o l l o w e d b y t h e J P E G f r o m which you want the slideshow to start. Playback of both the slidesh ow and th e audio files repeats. ⢠To play the contents of the whole disc rather than just the cu rr ent fold er, exi t the Disc Navigator and start playback using the ï¤ PLAY button. 00:00 / 00:00 0k bp s Fol der 1 Fol der2 Fol der3 Fol der4 File 1 File2 File3 File4 File5 Fol der 2 00:00 / 00:00 0k bp s DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 26 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
05 27 En Looping a section of a disc The A-B Repeat function allows you to specify two points (A and B) withi n a track (CD, Video CD/Super VCD) or title (DVD-Video and DVD-RW) that form a loop which is played over and over. ⢠You canâÂÂt use A-B Repeat with DVD-Audio, SACD, Video CD/Su per VCDs in PBC mode, or MP3/W MA/MPEG-4 AA C/ DivX video/WMV files. 1 During play back, press PLAY MODE and select â A-B Repe atâ from the list of functions on the left. 2 Press ENTER on âÂÂA(Start Point)â to set the loop start point. 3 Press ENTER on âÂÂB(End Point)â to set the loop end po int. After pressing ENTER , playback jumps back to the start point and plays the loop. 4 To resume norm al pl ayback, select âÂÂOffâ from the menu. Using repeat play There are various repea t play options, depending on th e kind of di sc loaded. ItâÂÂs also possible to use repea t play togeth er with program pl ay to repeat the tracks/c hapters in the program list (see Creating a program list on page 29). Important ⢠You canâÂÂt use Repe at play with Video C D/ Super VCDs in P BC mode, or with MP3/ WMA/MPEG-4 AAC discs. ⢠You canâÂÂt us e repeat and random pl ay at the same time. 1 During playback, press PLAY MODE and select âÂÂRep eatâ from the list of functions on the left. 2 Select a rep eat play option. If program pl ay is active, select Program Repeat to repeat the program l ist, or Rep eat Off to cancel. The repeat options ava ilable depend on the kind of disc loaded. For example , for DVD-Video and DVD-RW discs, you ca n select Titl e Repeat or Chapter Repeat (or Repeat Off ). ⢠For DVD-Audio discs, select Group Repeat or Track Repeat (or Repeat O ff ). ⢠For SACDs, CD s and Video CD/ Super VCDs, select Disc Repeat or Track Repeat (or Repeat Off ). ⢠For DivX video/WMV discs, select Title Repeat , and for so me DivX media files, select Cha pter Repeat (or Repeat Off ). A(Start Point) B(End Point) Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Title Repeat Chapter Repeat Repeat Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Title Repeat Chapter Repeat Repeat Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 27 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
05 28 En Using random play Use the random play func tion to play titles or chapters (DVD-Video), groups (DVD-Audio), or tracks (DVD-Aud io, SACD, CD, Video CD/ Super V CD) at random. ( Note that the sa me track/ti tle/chapter m ay play m ore than o nce.) You can set the random play option when a disc is playing or stopped. Important ⢠Random play re mains in effect un til you select Random Off fr om the ran dom play menu option s. ⢠You canâÂÂt use random play with VR forma t DVD-R/-RW discs, Video CD/S uper VCDs playing in PBC mode, MP3/WMA/ MPEG-4 AAC discs, DivX video/W MV discs, or while a DVD disc menu is being displayed. ⢠You canâÂÂt use ra ndom play together with program or repeat p lay. 1 Press PLAY MODE and s elect âÂÂRandomâ from the list of functions on the left. 2 Selec t a random play option. The random p lay options avail able depend on the kind of disc loaded. For exa mple, for DVD-Video discs, you can select Random T itle or Random Ch apter (or Rand om Off ). ⢠For DVD-Audio discs, select Random Group or Ra ndom Track (or Random Off ). ⢠For SACD, CD s and Video CD/ Super VCDs, select On or Off to switch random p lay on or off . Tip ⢠Use the following c ontrols during random play: Random Title Random Chapter Random Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Random Title Random Chapter Random Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Button What it does ï° NEXT Selects a new track/title/ chapter at random. ï¯ PREV Returns to the beginning of the current track/title/chapter. DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 28 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
05 29 En Creating a program li st This feature lets you prog ram the play order o f titles/ch apters/gro ups/tracks on a disc . Important ⢠You ca nâÂÂt use Progr am play with VR format DVD-R/-RW discs, Video CD/S uper VCDs playing in PBC mode, JPEG, or while a DVD disc menu is being displ ayed. 1 Press PLAY MODE and select âÂÂProgramâ from the list of functions on the left. 2 Select â Create/Editâ from the list of program optio ns. 3 Use the cursor buttons and ENTER to select a title, chap ter or track for the current step in the program list. For a DVD-Video disc, you can add a title or a chapter to the program list. ⢠For a DVD-Audio disc, you can add a whole group, or a track within a group to the program list. ⢠For a SACD , CD or Video CD/S uper VCD, select a track to add to the program list. After pressing ENTER to selec t the titl e/ chapter/group/track, the step number automatically moves down o ne. 4 Repea t step 3 to bu ild up a prog ram list. A program list can c ontain up to 24 titles/ chapters/tracks. ⢠To delet e a step, hi ghlight i t and pres s CLEAR . 5 To play the program list, press ï¤ PLAY. Program play remains ac tive until you turn off program play (see below), erase the pr ogram list (see below), eject the disc or switch off the player. Tip ⢠Use the fol lowing c ontrols durin g program play: Other functions available from the program menu There are a number of other options in the program menu in addition to Create/Edit . ⢠Playback Start â Starts playbac k of a saved program list. ⢠Playback Stop â Tur ns off program play, but does not era se the program list. ⢠Program Delete â Erases the program list and turns off pro gram play. Create/Edit Playback Start Playback Stop Program Delete A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Program Step 01. 01 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Title 1~38 Title 01 Title 02 Title 03 Title 04 Title 05 Title 06 Title 07 Title 08 Chapter 1~004 Chapter 001 Chapter 002 Chapter 003 Chapter 004 Program Button What it does PLAY MODE Save the program list and exit the program edit screen without starting playback ( HOME MENU does the same). ï° NEXT Skip to the next step in the program list. DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 29 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
05 30 En Searchin g a disc You can sear ch DVD-Vide o discs by titl e or chapter number, or by time; DVD-Audio discs can be searched by group or track number; SACDs by track number, CD s and Video CD/ Super VCDs by track nu mber or time; DivX video/WMV discs by time, and some DivX media files by chapter number. Important ⢠Search func tions are not available with Video CD/Super VCDs in PBC mode, or with MP3/WMA/MPEG -4 AAC discs. 1 Press PLAY MODE and select âÂÂSearch Modeâ fro m the list of functions on the left. 2 Selec t a search mode. The search options ava ilable depend on the kind of disc loaded. ⢠The disc must be playing in order to use time search. 3 Use the number bu ttons to enter a title, chapter or track nu mber, or a time. ⢠For a time searc h, enter the num ber of minutes and seconds into the currently playing title (DVD /DivX video/WMV) or track (CD/Video CD/Super VCD ) you want playback to resume from. For example, press 4 , 5 , 0 , 0 to have playback start from 45 minutes into the disc. For 1 ho ur, 20 minutes and 30 seconds, press 8 , 0 , 3 , 0 . ⢠Some DVD-Audio discs feature pages of browsable pictures. Enter the page number you want. 4 Press ENTER to start playback. Note ⢠Time search is not avai lable with DVD R/ RW. Switching subtitles Some DVD-Video and DivX video discs have subtitle s in one o r more lang uages; the disc box will usuall y tell you which subtitle language s are available . You can switch subtitle languag e during p layback. ⢠Press SUBTITLE repeatedly to select a subtitle op tion. Note ⢠Some discs only allow you to change subtitle language from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU or MENU to access. ⢠To set subtitle preferences, see Subtitle Language on page 40. ⢠See Displaying exter nal subtitle files on page 8 for more on DivX subtitles. 0 0 1 Title Search Chapter Search Time Search Input Chapter A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Subtitle English 1/2 Current / T otal DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 30 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
05 31 En Switching audio langua ge/ channels When playing a DVD-Video and DivX video disc recorde d with dialog i n two or more languages, you can switc h audio langu age during pla yback. When playing a VR forma t DVD-R/-RW disc recorded with dual-mono audio, you can switch between the main, su b, and mixed channels during pl ayback. When playing a DVD-Audio disc, you may be able to switch channels â see the di sc box for details. (W hen you change the audio chann el, playback restarts from the beginning of the current track.) When playing a Video C D/Super VCD, yo u can switch between stereo, just t he left channel or just the rig ht channe l. ⢠Press AUD IO repeated ly to select an audio lang uage/channel option . The languag e/channel inf ormation is shown on-screen. Note ⢠Some DVD discs only allow you to change audio language from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU or MENU to access. ⢠To set DVD audio language prefe rences, see Audio Lang uage on page 40. Zooming the s creen Using the zoom feature you can magnify a pa rt of the screen by a facto r of 2 or 4, while watching a DVD, DivX video/WMV title or Video CD/Super VC D or playing a JPEG disc. 1 During playb ack, use the ZOOM button to select th e zoom factor (Norma l, 2x or 4x). ⢠Since DVD, Video CD/Super VCD , DivX video/WMV title an d JPEG pictures have a fixed resolution, picture quality will deteriorate, especially at 4x zoom. This is not a malfunction. 2 Use the cursor butt ons to change the zoomed area. You can change the zoom f actor and the zoomed area freely during playback. ⢠If the navigation squa re at the top of the screen disappears, press ZOOM again to display it. Switching camera angles Some DVD discs feature scenes shot from two or more angles â check the disc box fo r details. When a mu lti-angle scene is playing, a icon appears on scre en to let you know tha t other angles ar e available (this can be switched off if you prefer â see Angle Indicator on page 41). ⢠During playback, press ANGLE to switch angle. Displaying disc informa tion Various track, chap ter and title inf ormation, such as the elapsed and remaining playing time can be disp layed on-s creen while a dis c is playing. ⢠To show/switch/hide the information displayed, press DISPLAY repeate dly. ⢠When a di sc is pla ying, the information appears at the top of the screen. Press DISPLAY repeat edly to chan ge the displayed in formatio n. DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 31 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
06 32 En Chapter 6 USB playback Using the USB interface It is possible to listen to two-channel audio and watch DivX video/WMV/ JPEG files using the USB interface on t he front of this unit. Connect a USB mass storage device as shown below. Note ⢠This includes playback of DivX video/ WMV/MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC/JPEG files (except files with copy-protection or restricted playback). ⢠Compatible USB devices include portab le flash memory (particularly keydrives) and digital audio players ( MP3 players) of format FAT16/32. It is not possible to connect th is unit to a personal co mputer for USB playback. ⢠Pioneer cannot guarant ee compatibility (operation and/or bus power) with all USB mass storage devices and assumes no responsibility for any lo ss of data that may occur when co nnected to this unit. ⢠With large amounts of data, it ma y take longer for the system to read the contents of a USB device. ⢠Some USB devices may not be properly recognized. ⢠Even when th ey are in a su pported format, some files may not play or display depending on the content. 1 With the player switched on, press DVD/USB. Ma k e s u re y ou r T V i s on a n d s e t t o th e co r r ec t video input, and that USB MODE is s howin g on the front panel display. 2 Connect your US B device. The USB termin al is located on the front panel. ⢠Disc Navigator is automatically displayed. 3 Press ENTER to start pl ayback. ⢠T h e m e t h o d o f p l a y b a c k f o r f i l e s s a v e d o n a USB device is the same a s for other discs. For more information, see Basic playback contro ls on page 21 and Playing discs on page 23. 4 Turn off this player and remove the USB device. ⢠The next time you turn this player on i t will start up in USB mode. To return to DV D mode, either press DVD/USB or press ï¨ OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray. Important If a USB ERR message ligh ts in the display, it may mean th at the power require ments of the USB device are too high fo r this player, or that the device is incompatibl e. Try the following: ⢠Switch the player off, then on again. ⢠Reconnecting the USB d e vice with the player switched off. ⢠Change the player back to DVD mode ( LOADING will appear in the front pa nel display whether a disc is inserted or not) by pressing DVD/USB , then o nce again select USB mod e ( USB MODE wi ll appear in the fro nt panel d isplay). ⢠Using a dedicated AC adapter (supplied with the device) for USB power. If this doesnâÂÂt remedy the problem, it is l ikely your USB devic e is incomp atible. ï¨ î OPEN/CLOSE HOME MENU RETURN ENTER TOP MENU MENU USB DVD/USB USB mass sto rage device USB (Type A) DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 32 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
06 33 En Recording the tracks of a music CD on a USB device The track s of a music C D loaded in this u nit can be recorded on a USB co nnected to the USB port. Recording all the tra cks 1 Load the musi c CD. ⢠Press ï§ STOP to stop playback. 2 Press USB REC to display the âÂÂCD -> USB Recâ screen. 3 Press ENTER to start recording. ⢠Recording starts. The screen shown below is displa yed durin g recording . Note ⢠Recording cann ot be started if there is no t enough free space on the USB device.In this case, âÂÂAvailable US B space is lowâ is displayed. Record ing speci fic tracks 1 Load the music CD. ⢠Press ï§ STOP to stop pla yback. 2 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂCD -> USB RecâÂÂ. ⢠CD -> USB R ec can only be select ed when the musi c CD is st opped. 3 Select the track yo u want to record. ⢠Indivi dual â Select one tr ack at a time. ⢠Select All â Select all t he tracks. ⢠All Clear â Clear all se lected tracks . PLAY MODE ZOOM DISPLAY PREV PAUSE STOP NEXT REC USB CD âÂÂ> USB Rec Select T rack Bitrate Start Selected T rack T otal Time T rack 1âÂÂ13 î î Tr a c k 0 1 î î Tr a c k 0 2 î î Tr a c k 0 3 î î Tr a c k 0 4 î î Tr a c k 0 5 î î Tr a c k 0 6 î î Tr a c k 0 7 î î Tr a c k 0 8 î 01:43 î 03:17 î 04:18 î 04:59 î 04:20 î 04:38 î 04:40 î 04:11 î 128kbps î 13 î 055:07 T rack Pr ogress T otal Progress Selected T rack T otal Time î 13 î 055:07 Cancel î 01:43 î 03:17 î 04:18 î 04:59 î 04:20 î 04:38 î 04:40 î 04:11 T rack 1âÂÂ13 î î Tr a c k 0 1 î î Tr a c k 0 2 î î Tr a c k 0 3 î î Tr a c k 0 4 î î Tr a c k 0 5 î î Tr a c k 0 6 î î Tr a c k 0 7 î î Tr a c k 0 8 CD âÂÂ> USB Rec ENTER RETURN HOME MENU CD â > USB Rec Start Selected T rack T otal Time ï¦ï 00 ï¦ï 000:00 Select T rack Bitrate Individual Select All All Clear ï¦ï 01:43 ï¦ï 03:17 ï¦ï 04:18 ï¦ï 04:59 ï¦ï 04:20 ï¦ï 04:38 ï¦ï 04:40 ï¦ï 04:11 T rack 1âÂÂ13 Tr a c k 0 1 Tr a c k 0 2 Tr a c k 0 3 Tr a c k 0 4 Tr a c k 0 5 Tr a c k 0 6 Tr a c k 0 7 Tr a c k 0 8 CD âÂÂ> USB Rec Start Selected T rack T otal Time ï¦ï 01 ï¦ï 003:17 Select T rack Bitrate Individual Select All All Clear ï¦ï 01:43 ï¦ï 03:17 ï¦ï 04:18 ï¦ï 04:59 ï¦ï 04:20 ï¦ï 04:38 ï¦ï 04:40 ï¦ï 04:11 T rack 1âÂÂ13 Tr a c k 0 1 ï§ î Tr a c k 0 2 Tr a c k 0 3 Tr a c k 0 4 Tr a c k 0 5 Tr a c k 0 6 Tr a c k 0 7 Tr a c k 0 8 CD âÂÂ> USB Rec DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 33 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
06 34 En 4 Select the bit rate (transfer rate). â¢S e l e c t 128 kbps , 192 kbps or 320 kbps . 5 Select âÂÂStartâ using the ï©/ïª/ï«/ ï¬ (cursor) buttons, then press ENTER . â¢R e c o r d i n g s t a r t s . Note ⢠When recording is finished, a folder named âÂÂPIONEERâ is created automatically on the USB de vice. The recorded tracks are stored in this f older. ⢠Up to 99 âÂÂPIONEERâ folders can be created. ⢠Recording is not possible if the USB device contains 300 folders or more. Start Selected T rack T otal Time ï¦ï 03 ï¦ï 012:17 Select T rack Bitrate ï§ î 128kbps 192kbps 320kbps ï¦ï 01:43 ï¦ï 03:17 ï¦ï 04:18 ï¦ï 04:59 ï¦ï 04:20 ï¦ï 04:38 ï¦ï 04:40 ï¦ï 04:11 T rack 1âÂÂ13 Tr a c k 0 1 ï§ î Tr a c k 0 2 Tr a c k 0 3 Tr a c k 0 4 ï§ î Tr a c k 0 5 Tr a c k 0 6 ï§ î Tr a c k 0 7 Tr a c k 0 8 CD âÂÂ> USB Rec CD âÂÂ> USB Rec Select T rack Bitrate Start Selected T rack T otal Time T rack 1âÂÂ13 î Tr a c k 0 1 ï§ î Tr a c k 0 2 î Tr a c k 0 3 î Tr a c k 0 4 ï§ î Tr a c k 0 5 î Tr a c k 0 6 ï§ î Tr a c k 0 7 î Tr a c k 0 8 ï¦ï 01:43 ï¦ï 03:17 ï¦ï 04:18 ï¦ï 04:59 ï¦ï 04:20 ï¦ï 04:38 ï¦ï 04:40 ï¦ï 04:11 ï¦ï 128kbps ï¦ï 03 ï¦ï 012:17 T rack Pr ogress T otal Progress Selected T rack T otal Time ï¦ï 03 ï¦ï 012:17 Cancel ï¦ï 01:43 ï¦ï 03:17 ï¦ï 04:18 ï¦ï 04:59 ï¦ï 04:20 ï¦ï 04:38 ï¦ï 04:40 ï¦ï 04:11 T rack 1âÂÂ13 î Tr a c k 0 1 ï§ î Tr a c k 0 2 î Tr a c k 0 3 î Tr a c k 0 4 ï§ î Tr a c k 0 5 î Tr a c k 0 6 ï§ î Tr a c k 0 7 î Tr a c k 0 8 CD âÂÂ> USB Rec DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 34 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
07 35 En Chapter 7 Audio Settings and Video Adjust menus Audio Settings menu The Audio Se ttings menu offers features for adjusting the way discs sound. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂAudio Settingsâ from the on-scre en display. 2 Select and change settings using the ï©/ ïª/ï«/ï¬ (cursor) buttons, and EN TER. Virtual Surround â¢S e t t i n g s : On , Off (default) Switch on Vi rtual Sur round to enjoy realistic surround sound effects from just two speakers. Note ⢠96 kHz linear PCM audio is automatica lly downsampled to 48 kHz if Virtual Surround is switched on. ⢠If the pl ayer is output ting Dolb y Digital, DTS or MPEG bitstream audio (in other words, no conversion to PCM), Virtual Surround ha s no effect on the audio from the digital output. See Digital Audio Out settings on page 38 for how to set up the digital output formats. ⢠How good the surround effect is varies with the disc. Audio DRC ⢠Settings: High , Medium , Low , Off (defaul t) When watching Dolby Digital D VDs at low volume, itâÂÂs easy to lose the quie ter sounds comple tely â inc luding some of the di alog. Switchin g Audio DR C (Dynamic Ra nge Control) t o on can he lp by bring ing up th e quieter sounds, while co ntrolling loud peaks. How much of a difference you hea r depends on the material youâÂÂre listening to . If the material doesnâÂÂt have wide variations in volume, you may not notice much chan ge. Note ⢠Audio DRC is only effective with D olby Digital audio sources. ⢠Audio DRC is only effective throu gh the digital output when Digital Out is set to On , and Dolby Digital Out is set to Dolby Digital > PCM (see Digital Audi o Out settings on page 38). ⢠The effect of Audio DRC also depends on your speakers and A V receiver settings. Dialog ⢠Settings: High , Medium , Low , Off (defaul t) The Dialog feature is designed to make the dialog stand out from other background sounds in the soundtracks. Video Adjust menu From the Video Adjust screen you can adjust various settings that affect how the pict ure is presented. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂVideo Adjustâ from the on -screen display. Audio Settings Audio Settings Virtual Surround Audio DRC Dialog On Off Video Adjust DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 35 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
07 36 En 2 Make settings using the ï©/ïª/ï«/ï¬ (cursor) buttons, an d ENTER. You can ad just the f ollowing picture qu ality settings: ⢠Sharpness â Adjusts the sharpness of edges in the picture ( Fine , Standard (default) , Soft ). ⢠Brightness â Adjusts the overall brightness ( âÂÂ20 to 20 ). ⢠Contrast â Adjusts the contrast between light and dark ( âÂÂ16 to 16 ). ⢠Gamma â Adjusts the âÂÂgr adationâ of the picture ( âÂÂ3 to 3 ). ⢠Hue â Adjusts the red/green balance ( green 9 to red 9 ). ⢠Chroma Level â Adjusts how saturated colors appea r ( âÂÂ9 to 9 ). ⢠BNR â S witches on/off block noise reduction ( On , Off (default) ). Adjust the Brightness , Contrast , Hue , Gamma and Chroma Leve l se ttings using the ï«/ï¬ (cursor lef t/right) bu ttons. 3 Press ENTER to re turn to the Video Adjust screen, or HOME MENU to exit. Sharpness Brightness Contrast Gamma Hue Chroma Level BNR Standard 0 0 0 0 0 Off ï¤ ï¤ ï¤ ï¤ ï¤ ï¤ ï¤ Video Adjust Brightness min max 0 DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 36 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
08 37 En Chapter 8 Initial Settings menu Using the Initial Setti ngs menu The Initial Settings menu p rovides audio and video output settings, parental lock settings, and display settings, among others. If an option is gray ed out it means that it cannot be changed at the current time. This is usually bec ause a disc is playing . Stop the disc, then change the settin g. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂInitial SettingsâÂÂ. 2 Use the cursor buttons and ENTER to select the setting and option you wan t to set. All the settings and options are explained on the following pages. Note ⢠In the table below, the default sett ing is shown in bold ; other settings are shown in italics . â¢T h e Digital Audio Out settings only need to be set if you have connected the digital output of this player to an A V receiver, or other equipment. ⢠Check the operati ng instructions supplied with your other equipment to see which digital aud io formats itâÂÂs compat ible with. ⢠Some settings, such as TV Screen , Audio Langua ge and Subtitle Language may be overridden by the DVD disc. Often these settings can also be made from the DVD disc menu. â¢T h e HDMI Out , HDMI Resolution and HDMI Color settings only need to be set if you connected this player to an HDMI-compatible compon ent using the HDMI connector. â¢T h e Digital Audio Out , Compone nt Out , AV Connector Out and Speakers settings cannot be set if the player is con nected t o an HDMI-compa tible compone nt using the HDMI connector. Additionally, certa in settings such as HDMI Out , HDMI Resolution , and HDMI Color may be changed automatically. Initial Settings DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 37 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
08 38 En Digital Audio Out settings Setting Option What it means HDMI Out LPCM ( 2CH) Set if your monitor or device only accepts stereo input. On this setting mul tichannel audio is downmixed to 2 channels for stereo linear PCM output. LPCM ( 5.1CH) Set if the monitor or device you hav e connected using HDMI is compatible with Linear PCM mu lti- channel formats. All audi o signals are output as linear PCM 5.1 format. (Use this setting if you want to decode all streams by a player .) Auto Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG sources are processed according to how they were encoded, and linear PCM sources are heard as is. Auto (DSD) Set if you want to output DSD audio from an SACD source. Off No digital audio output. Ch oose this option when you want to change the Digital Audio Out and Speakers settings. Digital Out On Digital audio is output from the digital outputs. Off No digital audio output. Dolby Digital Out Dolby Digital Dolby D igital encoded digital audio i s output when playing a Dolby Digital DVD di sc. Dolby Digital > PCM Dolby Digital audio is converted to PCM audio before being output. DTS Out DTS DTS encoded digital audio is output when playing a DTS disc. (Noise will be output if your amplifier/ receiver is not compatible with D TS audio.) DTS > PCM No digital audio is output when playing a DTS disc.DTS audio is converted to PCM audio before being output. Linear PCM Out D own Sample On 96 kHz digital audio is converted to 48 kHz for digital output. Note that Hig h sampling rate DVD- Audio discs (192 kHz or 176.4 kHz) automatically output down-sampled audio through the digital outputs. Down Sample Off 96 kHz digital audio is output as is at 96 kHz. MPEG Out MPEG MPEG encoded digital audio is output as is. MPEG > PCM MPEG enc oded digital audio is converted to PCM audio for digital output. DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 38 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
08 39 En Video Output settings Setting Option What it means TV Screen (This setting effective for analog and HDMI video output. See also Screen sizes and disc formats on page 51.) 4:3 (Letter Box) Set if you have a conventional 4:3 TV . W i descreen movies are shown with black bars top and bottom. 4:3 ( Pan & Scan) Set if you have a conventional 4:3 TV . Wides c reen movies are shown with the sides cropped so that the image fills the screen. 16:9 ( Wide) Set if you have a widescreen TV . 16:9 (Compr essed) Can be selected when you are connected via HDMI, and have the HDMI Resolution set to 1920x1080p , 1920x1080i or 1280x720p . Video in 4:3 can be properly displayed on a 16:9 high definition television (w ith black bars shown on either side of the screen). Component Out Progressive Set if your TV is compatible with progressive scan video (see your TVâÂÂs instruction manu al for details). The PRGS VE indicator lights in the front panel display . See also Switching the video output to interlace using the front panel controls on page 12. Note that progressive scan video is only output from the component video jacks. Interlace Set if your TV is not compatible with progressive scan video. HDMI Resolution 1920x1 080p Set if your TV supports 1920 x1080 pixel progressiv e-scan v ideo (24 Hz frame rate is not supported). 1920x1 080i Set if your TV supports 1920x1080 pix el interlace video. 1280x7 20p Set if your TV supports 1280x720 pixel progressive-scan video. 720x480p (NTSC)/ 720x576p (PAL) Set if your TV supports 720x480 pixel (NTSC)/ 720x576 pixel (PAL) progressive -scan video. 720x480i (NTSC)/ 720x576i (PAL) Set if your TV supports 720x480 pixel (NTSC)/ 720x576 pixel (PAL) interlace video . HDMI Color Full range RGB If colors are weak, this gives brighter colors and deeper black. RGB Use this setting if colors appear overly rich on th e Full range RGB setting. Compon ent Outputs component video format (default setting for HDMI-compatible devices). DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 39 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
08 40 En Language settings Setting Option What it means Audio Langu age English (for Taiwanes e model, Chinese) If there is an English (for T aiwanese model, Chinese) soundtrack on the disc then it will be played. Languages as displayed If there is the language selected on the disc, then it will be played. Other Language Select to choose a language other than the ones displayed (page 53). Subtitle Language (See also Displaying external subtitle files on page 8.) English (f or Taiwanes e model, Chinese) If there are English (for T aiwanese model, Chinese) subtitles on the disc then they will be displayed. Languages as displayed If there i s the subtitle lan guage selected on th e disc, then it will be displayed. Other Language Select to choose a language other than the ones displayed (page 53). DVD Menu Lang. w /Subtitle Lang. DVD disc menus will be displayed in the same language as your selected subtitle lang uage, if possible. Languages as displayed DVD disc menus will be di splayed in the selected language, if possible. Other Language Select to choose a language other than the ones displayed (page 53). Subtitle Display On Subtitles are displayed according to your selected subtitle language (see above). Off Subtitles are always off by default when you play a DVD disc (note that some discs override this setting). DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 40 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
08 41 En Display settings Options settings Parental Lock ⢠Default level: Off ; Default password: none ; Default Country/Area code: us (2119) To give you some control o ver what your children watch on your D VD player, some DVD-Video discs feature a Parental Lock level. If your player is set to a lower level than th e disc, the disc wonâÂÂt play. Some discs also supp ort the Country/Area Code feature. The player does not play certain scenes on these discs, depending on the Country/Area Code you set. Setting Option What it means OSD Languag e English (for Tai wanese mod el, Chinese) On-screen displays of the pl ayer are in English (for T aiwanese model, Chinese). Languages as displayed On-screen displays are shown in the language selected. Angle Indicato r On A camera icon is displayed on-screen during multi-angle scenes on a DVD disc. Off No multi-angle indication i s shown. Setting Option What it means Parental Lock â See Parental Lock below. DVD Playback Mo de DVD-Audio All material on a DV D-Audio disc is playable. DVD-Video Only the DVD- Video part of a DVD-Audio disc is playable. SACD Playback 2ch Area Selects the 2 channel (strereo) SACD audio area of the disc for playback. Multi-c h Area Selects the multi-channel SACD audio area of the disc for playback. CD Area Selects the standard CD audio area of an SACD/ CD hybrid disc for playback. DTS Downmix STEREO Downmixes DTS for 2 channel output to regular stereo. (Se e also DTS Downmix on page 43.) Lt/Rt Downmixes DTS for 2 channel output to be compatible with Dolby Surround matrix decoders. (See also DTS Downmix on page 43.) DivX VOD Display See About DivXî VOD content on page 43. DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 41 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
08 42 En Note ⢠Not all discs use Parental Lock, an d will play without requiring the password first. ⢠If you forget your password, you âÂÂll need to reset the player to register a new password (see Resetting the player on page 53). Registering a new password You must register a password before you can change the Parental Lock level or enter a Country code. 1 Select âÂÂO ptionsâÂÂ, then âÂÂPassw ordâÂÂ. 2U s e t h e n u m b e r b u ttons to enter a 4-digit p assword. The numbe rs you enter show up as asterisks (*) on-screen. 3 Press ENTER to register the password. You will return to the Options menu screen. Changing your password To change your password, confirm your existing password then enter a new one. 1 Selec t âÂÂPassword Changeâ . 2 Use the number butto ns to enter your existing passwo rd, then press ENTER. 3 Enter a new password an d press ENTER . This registers the new password and you will return to the Options men u screen. Setting/changing the Parental Lock 1 Select â Level ChangeâÂÂ. 2 Use numb er buttons to enter your password, then press ENTER. 3 Select a new level an d press ENTER. ⢠Press ï« (cursor le ft) repea tedly to lo ck more levels (more discs will require the password); press ï¬ (cur sor right) to unlock levels. You canâÂÂt lo ck level 1. This sets the new level and you will return to the Options menu screen. Setting/changing the Country/Area code You can find the Country/Area code list on page 60. 1 Select âÂÂCou ntry CodeâÂÂ. 2 Use numb er buttons to enter your password, then press ENTER. 3 Select a Country/Are a code and press ENTER. There are two ways you can do this: ⢠Select by code letter: Use ï©/ïª (cursor up/ down) to c hange th e Country/Are a code. ⢠Select by code number: Press ï¬ (cursor right) then use th e number buttons to enter the 4-digit Country/Area code. The new Country/Area code is set and you will return to the Optio ns menu screen. Note that the new Countr y/Area code doesnâÂÂt tak e effect until the next disc is load ed (or the current disc is reloaded). Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers Parental Loc k DVD Pla yback Mode SACD Pla yback DTS Downmix DivX V OD Pas swo rd Level Change Country Code Initial Settings DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 42 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
08 43 En DTS Downmix ⢠Default setti ng: STEREO If youâÂÂve selected DTS > PCM in DTS Out on page 38 or 2 Channel in Audio Output Mo de on page 44, you can choose the way the signa l is downmixed to PCM audio. STEREO will downmix the DTS signal to 2-chann el stereo, whereas Lt/Rt will downmix to a 2-channel signal compatib le with Dolby surround matrix decoders. (This allows yo u to hear surroun d sound if your AV receiver or amplifier ha s Dolby Pro Logic capability.) About DivX î VOD content In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand) content on this player, you first need to register the player with the DivX VO D registration system. You do this by generating a DivX VOD registration code from the device, wh ich you will submit to DivX via the DivX Player program available for your computer. Important ⢠DivX VOD content is protected by a DRM (Digital Right s Management ) system. This restricts playback of content to specific, registered devices. ⢠If you load a disc that c ontains Di vX VOD content not authorized for your play er, the message Authorization Error is displayed and the c ontent wil l not play. ⢠Resetting the player (as described in Resetting the player on page 53) will not cause you to lose your registration code. Displaying your DivX VOD registration code 1 Press HOM E MENU and sel ect âÂÂInitial SettingsâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂOptio nsâÂÂ, then âÂÂDivX VODâ . 3 Select âÂÂDi splayâÂÂ. Your 8-digit registration code i s displayed. ⢠Make a note o f the code as you will need it to complete your registratio n. Playing DivX î VOD content Some DivX VOD con tent may only be play able a fixed number of times. When you load a disc containing this type of DivX VOD content, th e remaining num ber of plays is show n on-screen and you then have the option of playing the disc (thereby using up one of t he remaining plays), or stopping. If you load a disc that contains expired DivX VOD content (for example, content that has zero re maining plays), the message Rental Expired is displayed. If your DivX VOD content allo ws an unlimited number of plays, then yo u may load the disc into your player and play the content as often as you lik e, and no m essage will be displayed. Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers STEREO Lt/Rt Initial Settings Parental Loc k DVD Pla yback Mode SACD Pla yback DTS Downmix DivX V OD Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers Parental Loc k DVD Pla yback Mode SACD Pla yback DTS Downmix DivX V OD Display Initial Settings Initial Settings DivX (R) Video On Demand 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Y our registration code is: T o learn more visit www .divx.com/vod Done Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 43 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
08 44 En Speakers se ttings Audio Output Mode ⢠Default setti ng: 2 Channel If you connected this player to you r amplifier using the 5.1 chan nel analog outputs (fro nt, surround, center and subwoofer outs), set this to 5.1 Channel ; if you connected only the stereo outs, set to 2 Channel . Note ⢠Even if you set Audio Outp ut Mode to 5.1 Channel , youâÂÂll only g et sound from all speakers when playing a 5.1 ch annel multi-channel disc. ⢠When set to 5.1 Channe l , only the front left/ right chan nels are outp ut from t he AUDIO OUT (2ch) jacks. Chan ge to 2 Channel if you want to listen to downmixed stereo audio (for example, because y ou are listening through the TVâÂÂs built- in speakers). ⢠When set to 5.1 Channel there is no digital output when playing DVD-Audio. â¢I f y o u s e t t o 2 Channel , Dolby Di gital, DTS and MPEG audio is mixed down to two channels s o you still hea r all the aud io recorded on the disc. W ith DTS encoded audio, you can choose ho w the signal is downmixed to PCM audio. See DTS Downm ix on page 43 to change the downmix setting. ⢠Some DVD-Audio discs donâÂÂt allow down- mixing of audio. These discs always output multi-channel au dio regardless of the setting made here. Setting Option What it means Audio Output Mode 2 Channel The player outputs analog audio in stereo only . See also Audio Output Mode below. 5.1 Channel The player outputs 5.1 channel analog audio . See also Audio Output Mode below. Speaker Distance â Specify the distance of your speakers from your listening position. See also Speaker Distance on page 48. Speaker Installation â Specify the number and size of speakers in your system. See also Speaker Installati on on page 49. Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers Audio Output Mode Speaker Distance Speaker Installation 2 Channel 5.1 Channel Initial Settings DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 44 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
08 45 En About the audio output settings The table b elow sho ws how t he audio s ettings y ou make in t he Initial S etting s menu (see page 37) affect the outpu t from the 2 channel an d the 5.1 channel a nalog outputs, and from the digital outputs with va rious types of disc. Disc audio format Player setting Front L/ R analog outputs 1 1. When Audio Output Mode is set to 2C h a n n e l , the AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) FRONT L/R jacks act as a second pair of stereo audio outputs. Surround L/R, Ce nter, SW, outputs 1 Digital outputs PCM convert 2 2. Dolby Digital > PCM , MPEG > P CM or DTS > PCM setting (page 38) Bitstream 3 3. Dolby Digital , MPEG or DTS setting (page 38) DVD Dolby Digital 2ch 5.1ch 2ch downmix Fr o n t L / R â Surround L/R , Center , SW 2ch downmix Dolby Digita l Dolby Digital karaoke 2ch/5. 1ch Left/Right â Left/Right Dolby Digita l Linear PCM 2ch/5. 1ch Left/Right â Left/Right Lef t/Right DTS 2ch 5.1ch 2ch downmix Fr o n t L / R â Surround L/R , Center , SW 2ch downmix DTS MPEG 2ch 5.1ch Left/Right Fr o n t L / R â Surround L/R , Center , SW Left/Right MPEG DVD-Audio 2c h 5.1ch 2ch downmix 4 Fr o n t L / R 4. Discs that prohibit downmixing will be output as 5 .1 channel even if 2 Channel is sele cted as the Audio Ou tput Mode setting (page 44). â Surround L/R , Center , SW 2ch downmix 5 â 5. Discs that prohibit downmixing also mute the digital output. 2ch downmix 5 â DVD-RW (VR mode) 2ch/5. 1ch Left/Right 6 6. When Audio Output Mode is set to 5.1 Channel , mono sources are hea rd fr om the center speaker only. â Left/Right Dolby Digita l MPEG or PCM Super Audio CD 2ch 5.1ch 2ch downmix Fr o n t L / R â Surround L/R , Center , SW â â CD 2ch/5. 1ch Left/Right â Left/Right Lef t/Right DTS CD 2ch 5.1ch 2ch downmix Fr o n t L / R â Surround L/R , Center , SW 2ch downmix DTS Video CD 2ch/5. 1ch Left/Right â Left/Right Lef t/Right DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 45 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
08 46 En About the HDMI audio outp ut settings The table below shows how the audio set tings you make in the HDMI Out (see HDMI Out on page 38) and Audio Outp ut Mode screens ( Audio Output Mode on page 44) affect the HDMI output with various types of disc. Disc audio format HDMI Out setting LPCM (2CH) LPCM (5.1CH) Auto Auto (DSD) DVD Linear PCM 1 1. T hese formats include DVD-RW discs. Left/Right Left/Right Left/Right Left/Right MPEG 1 Left/Right 5.1ch 2 2. If the HDMI device you are using is not compatible with Multi-ch formats, the output signal is the same as LPCM (2CH) settin g. MPEG 3 3. If the HDMI device you are using is not compatible with these compressed formats, the signal is output as linear PCM. MPEG 3 Dolby Digital (karaoke) Left/Right 5.1ch 2 Dolby Digital 3 Dolby Digital 3 Dolby Digital 1 2ch downmix 5.1ch 2 Dolby Digital 3 Dolby Digital 3 DTS 2ch downmix 5.1ch 2 DTS 3 DTS 3 DVD-Audio (with CPPM) 4 4. I f the connected component is not DVD-Audio (CPPM) compatible, it is not possible to outp ut CPPM copy- controlled DVD-Audio sources from the HDMI connection (see HDMI output with DVD- Audio and SACD sources below for more on this). Left/Right or 2ch downmix 5 5. If the d iscs prohibit downmixing, output AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) FRONT L/R . 5.1ch 2 5.1ch 2 5.1ch 2 DVD-Audio (without C PPM) Left/Right or 2ch downmix 5 5.1ch 2 5.1ch 2 5.1ch 2 CD CD/MP3/WMA/ MPEG-4 AAC Left/Right Left/Right Left/Right Left/Right Video CD Left/Right Lef t/Right Left/Right Left/Right DTS CD Left/Right 5.1ch 2 DTS 3 DTS 3 Super Audio CD 6 6. If the connected HDMI device is not compatible wi th protected audio contents (su ch as DVD-Audio or SACD), SACD audio is not output from the HDMI terminal. Left/Right 5.1ch 2 5.1ch 2 5.1ch (DSD) 2,7 7. An alog SACD audio is not output when you have HDMI Out set to Auto (DSD) . DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 46 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
08 47 En HDMI output with DVD-Audio and SACD sources The way audio sources are output from the HDMI terminal depends on the specification of the connect ed component. Components specifica tion Example compo nent Disc format (DVD-Audi o or SACD) SACD 2ch 5.1ch Auto (DSD) Component /output SACD, DVD-Audio and 5.1 chan nel compatible on HDMI 1 1. This unit checks the specification of the connected component (such sample rate/multic hannel limitations and compatibility with protected audio contents) and outputs th e signal accordingly. Note that âÂÂDVD-Audio compatibleâ indicates compatibil ity with protected audio contents. âÂÂS AC D compatibleâ indicates c omp atibility with DSD si gnals. VSX-LX70 2ch 5.1ch 2 2. If HDMI Out setting (page 38) is s et to LPCM (2CH), DVD-Audio multichannel sources will be downmixed to stereo. (In cases where the source is downmix-prohibited, only the front left/right channels are output.) For SACD sources, the 2 channel (stereo) SACD audio area is selected. If the video output resolution is 480i, 576i, 480p or 576p, audio output ma y be limited to 2 channel (depending to the connected component). DSD 2ch / 5.1 ch DVD-Audio and 5.1 channel compati ble on HDMI 1 VSX-AX4A Vi-G 2ch 5.1ch 2 No sound DVD-Audio and 2c h a n n e l compatible on HDMI 1 PDP -508XDA/ PDP -508 XG PDP -428XDA/ PDP -428 XG 2ch Left/Right or 2ch downmix 3 3. In cases where the source is downmix-prohibited , only the front left/right channels are output. No sound Incompatible w ith DVD-Audio on HDMI 1 PDP -505HDC PDP -435HDC No sound 4 4. If CPPM shows in the front panel display, it means it is not possible to ou tput CPPM copycontrolled DVD-Audi o sources from the HDMI connect ion. Discs with no CPPM protection are limited to 2 channel output. No sound 4 No sound DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 47 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
08 48 En Speake r Distance ⢠Default setti ngs: all speakers 3.0m You only need to make this setting if y ou connected this player to your amp lifier using the 5.1 channel analog outp uts. These settings do not affect any digital audio output. To get the best surround so und from your system, you should set up the speake r distances from your listeni ng position. 1U s e t h e ï©/ïª (cursor up/down) to select a speaker. â¢T h e L and R speakers are paired; you canâÂÂt set them differently. 2P r e s s ï¬ (cursor right) to change the speaker di stance for the highligh ted speaker. 3U s e t h e ï©/ïª (curso r up/dow n) to change the distance. ⢠When you change the distance settings of the front left ( L ) or front right (R ) speakers, all the other speaker distances c hange relative to it. ⢠Front left/right ( L /R ) speaker distances can be set from 30 cm to 9 m in 30 cm in cre- ments. ⢠The center speaker ( C ) can be set from â 2.1 m to 0.0 m relative to the front left/right speakers. ⢠Surround left/right ( SL / SR ) speakers can be set from âÂÂ6.0 m to 0. 0 m relative to th e front left/rig ht speakers. ⢠You canâÂÂt set the subwoofer ( SW ) distance. 4 Press ï« (cursor left) to go back to the speaker list if you want to modify another speaker, or press ENTER to exit the Speaker Distance screen. Note During playback of SACD and M PEG-audio DVD-Video discs, the effective C , SL and SR speaker distance settings are âÂÂ0.9 m to 0.0 m relative to the front le ft/right speakers. Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers Audio Output Mode ï¤ 5.1 Channel Speaker Distance Speaker Installation Initial Settings Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers L C R SR SL 3.0m 3.0m 3.0m 3.0m 3.0m Initial Settings DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 48 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
08 49 En Speaker Inst allation â¢D e f a u l t s e t t i n g s : L/R: Large | C: Large | SL/ SR: Large | SW: On You only need to make this setting if y ou connected this player to your amp lifier using the 5.1 channel analog outp uts. This setting does not affect digital audio output. Use the Speaker Installation screen to tell the player what kinds of speakers you have connected. 1U s e t h e ï©/ïª (curso r up/down) buttons to select a speaker. â¢T h e L and R , and SR and SL speakers are paired; you canâÂÂt set them differently. 2P r e s s ï¬ (cursor right) to modify the selected spe aker. 3U s e t h e ï©/ïª (curso r up/down) buttons to change the current setting. ⢠You can see the effect of yo ur changes in the room graphic on the right of the screen. ⢠Except for the subwoofer, you can set speaker size to Large or Small . If the main speaker cone in the speaker is 1 2 cm or more, set to Large , otherwise set to Small (or Off if you donâÂÂt have th at speaker). ⢠If you set the front L and R speakers to Small , the center and su rround speakers are automa tically set to Smal l and the subwoofer to On . ⢠The subwoofer can only be set to On or Off . 4P r e s s ï« (cursor left) to go back to the speaker list if you want to modify another speaker, or press ENTER to exit the Speaker Installation screen. Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers Audio Output Mode ï¤ 5.1 Channel Speaker Distance Speaker Installation Initial Settings Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers L C R SR SL SW Large Large Large Large Large On Initial Settings DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 49 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
09 50 En Chapter 9 Additional information Taking care of your player and discs General Hold discs by the edge or by the center hole and edge. When youâÂÂre not using a disc, retu rn it to its case and store upright. Avoid leaving di scs in excessively cold, humid, or ho t environmen ts (including under direct sunlight). DonâÂÂt glue paper or put stickers on to discs. Do not use a pencil, ba ll-point pen o r other sharp-tipped writing inst rument to write on the disc. DonâÂÂt use self-adhesive disc labels on d iscs as these can cause the disc to wa rp slightly during playbac k causing d istor tion in the picture and/or sound. Damaged and shaped discs Do not use cracked, chip ped, warped, or otherwise damaged discs as they may damage the player. This player is designed to be used only with conventional, fully circu lar discs. Do not use shaped discs. Pioneer disclaims al l liability arising in connectio n with the use of shaped discs. Cleaning discs Fingerprints and dust on di scs can affect playback performance. Clean using a soft, dry cloth, wiping the disc li ghtly from the center to the outside edge as shown below. If necessar y, use a cloth soa ked in alcohol, or a commerci ally available CD/DVD cleaning kit to clean a disc more thorou ghly. Never use benzine, thinn er or other cleaning agents, including products designed fo r cleaning vinyl record s. Cleaning the unitâÂÂs exterior Unplug the unit before cleaning. Use a dry cloth to wipe off dust and di rt. If the surfaces are very dirty, wipe with a soft cloth dipped in some neutral cleanser diluted five or six times with water and wrung out well, then wipe again with a dry c loth. Do not use furniture wax or cleaners. Never use thin ners, benzine o r insectic ide sprays or other chemica ls on or near this uni t. If you use a ch emical-i mpregnated cleaning cloth, r ead the instruct ions carefully befo re use. These cloths may leave smea r marks on half-mirror finish surfaces; if this happens, finish with a dry clot h. DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 50 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
09 51 En Cleaning the pickup lens The DVD playerâÂÂs lens should not becom e dirty in normal use, but if for some reason it should malfunction due to dust o r dirt, consult your nearest Pioneer-a uthorized service center. W e do not recommend using commercially available le ns cleane rs fo r CD players. Condensation Condensation may form inside the player if it is brought into a wa rm room from outside, o r if the temperature of the room rises quickly. Although the condensatio n wonâÂÂt damage th e player, it may temporarily impair its performance. Leave it to adjust to the warmer temperature fo r about an hour be fore switching on. Moving the player If you need to move this unit, first re move the disc, if there's one loaded, and close the disc tray. Next, press ïµ STA NDBY/ON to switch the power to sta ndby, checking that th e -OFF- indication in the display goes off. Last ly, disconnect the power cord. Never lift or move the unit dur ing playback â discs rotate at a high speed and may be damaged. Caution for when the unit is installed in a rack with a glass door Do not press the ï¨ OPEN/CLOSE button on the rem ote control to op en the disc table while the glass door is closed. The do or will hamper movement of the disc table, and the disc table could be damaged. Screen sizes and disc formats DVD-Video discs come in several different screen aspect ratio s, ranging from TV programs, which are generally 4: 3, to CinemaScope widescree n movies, with an aspect ratio of up to about 7:3. Televisions, too, come in different a spect ratios; âÂÂstandardâ 4:3 and widescreen 16:9. Widescreen TV users If you have a widescreen TV, the TV Screen setting (page 39) of this player should be set to 16:9 (Wide) or 16:9 (Compressed) . When you watch discs recorded in 4:3 forma t with the 16:9 (Wide) setting, you can use the TV controls to select how th e picture is presented. Your TV may offer various zoom and stretch options; see the instructions that came with you r TV for details . Please note that some movie a spect ratios are wider than 16:9, so even though yo u have a widescreen TV, these discs will still play in a âÂÂletter boxâ style with black bars at the top and bottom of the screen. DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 51 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
09 52 En Standard TV users If you have a stan dard TV, the TV Screen setting (page 39) of this player shou ld be set to 4:3 (Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan & Scan) , depending on which you prefer. Set to 4:3 (Letter Box) , widescreen discs are shown with black bars top and bottom. Set to 4:3 (Pan & Scan) , widescreen discs are shown with the left and right sides cropped. Although the picture looks larger, you don âÂÂt actually see the whole picture. Please note that many widescreen discs override the playerâÂÂs settings so tha t the disc is shown in let ter box forma t regardles s of the setting. Note â¢U s i n g t h e 16:9 (Wide) or 16: 9 (Compressed) setting with a standard 4:3 TV, or either of the 4:3 settin gs with a widescreen TV, will result in a distorted picture. Setting the TV system ( Except Taiwanese mo del ) The defa ult settin g of this pl ayer is AUTO , and unless y ou notice that t he picture i s distorted when playing some discs, you should leave it set to AUTO . If yo u experience picture distortion with some discs, set the TV system to match your co untry or regionâÂÂs system . Doing this, however, m ay restrict the kinds of disc you can watch. The table below shows what kinds o f disc are compatible with each setting ( AUTO , NTSC and PAL ). 1 If the player is on, press ïµ STANDBY / ON to swi tch it to stan dby. 2 Using the front panel controls, hold down ï° then press ïµ STAND BY/ON to switch the TV system. The TV system changes as follows: ⢠AUTO ï¤ NTSC ⢠NTSC ï¤ PAL ⢠PAL ï¤ AUTO Note ⢠You have to switch the player in to standby (press ïµ STANDBY/ON ) before each change. Disc Type Player setting Form at NTSC PAL AU TO DVD/ Super VCD/ Video CD/ DivX video/ WMV NTSC NTSC PAL NTSC PAL NTSC PAL PAL CD/MP3/ WMA/ MPEG-4 AAC /JPEG no disc â NTSC PAL NTSC or PAL DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 52 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
09 53 En Resetting the player Use this procedu re to reset all the playerâÂÂs settings to the factory defa ult. 1 Switch the player in to standby. 2 Using the front panel buttons, hold down the ï§ (sto p) button and pre ss ïµ STANDBY/ON to switch the playe r back on. All the playerâÂÂs settings a re now reset. DVD-Video regions All DVD-Video discs car ry a region mark on the case somewhere that indicates which region(s) of the world the di sc is compatible with. Your DVD player also has a region mark, which you can fin d on the rear pan el. Discs from inco mpatible regions wil l not p lay in this player. In this case the attention senten ce Incompatible disc regi on number CanâÂÂt play disc is displayed on screen. Discs marked ALL will pla y in any play er. The diagram below shows the various DVD regions of the world. Selecting languages using the language code list Some of th e language options (such as âÂÂDVD Menu Lang .â in the Init ial Settings ) allow you to set your preferred lan guage from any of the 136 languages listed in the language co de list on page 60. 1 Select âÂÂOther Lang uageâÂÂ. 2U s e t h e ï«/ï¬ (cursor left/right) buttons to select either a code letter or a code numbe r. 3U s e t h e ï©/ïª (cursor up/d own) buttons to select a code letter or a code number. See Language code list on page 60 for a complete list of languages and cod es. 1 2 2 5 5 6 3 2 1 4 4 DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 53 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
09 54 En Troubleshooting Incorrect operatio n is often mistaken for tro ubl e or malfu nction. If you think th at there is something wrong with this comp onent, check the points below. Sometimes the trou ble may lie in another co mponent. Inspect th e other componen ts and electrical appl iance s being used. If the trouble cannot be recti fied after checking the items below, ask your nearest P ioneer authorized service center or yo ur dealer to carry out repair work. Problem Remedy The disc wonâÂÂt play or is automatically ejected after loading. ⢠Make sure the disc is free from dirt and dust and is not damaged (page 50). ⢠Make sure the disc is loaded with the label side face-up and aligned properly in the disc tray guide. ⢠Incompatible region number: If the region number on a DVD-Video disc does not match the number on the player, the disc cannot be used (page 53). In this case the attention sentence âÂÂIncompatible disc region number CanâÂÂt play discâ is displayed on screen. ⢠Condensation inside the player: Allow time for condensation to evaporate. Avoid using the player near an air-conditioning unit. ⢠Disc is loaded upside down: Reload the disc with the label side face up. ⢠A Super VCD that does not conf orm with the IEC standards might not play normally. DVD-Audio playba ck stops. ⢠The disc may have been il legally copied. Picture playback stops and the operation buttons cannot be used. ⢠P re ss ï§ STOP , then start playback again ( ï¤ PLAY ). ⢠Switch the power off once, unplu g from the wall socket, then plug back in and switch on ag ain using the front panel ïµ STAN DBY/ON button. New settings made in the Setup screen menus while a disc is playing are ineffective. ⢠Some settings can be changed while a disc is p laying, but are not effective until the disc is stopped then restarted: Press ï§ STOP , then start playback again ( ï¤ PLA Y ). Settings are canceled. ⢠When the power is cut due to po wer failure or by unplugging the power cord, settings will be canceled: Press ïµ STANDBY/ON on the front panel to turn the player off. Wait for -OFF- to disappear from the display, then unplug the power cord. The remote control doesnâÂÂt seem to work. ⢠The remote control is too far from the player, or the angle with the remote sensor is too wide: Use the remote within its operating range (page 17). ⢠The bat terie s are ex hausted : Put in ne w ones (page 5). DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 54 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
09 55 En No picture/No color. ⢠Incorrect video connection s: Check that connections are correc t and that plugs are inse rted fully . Also check the video cable for damage. ⢠TV/monitor or AV amplifier settings are incorrect: Check the instruction manual of the c onnected equipment. ⢠The video output is set to progre ssive but your TV/mo nitor is not compatible with progressive scan: See page 12 for how to set to Interlace . Screen is stretched or aspect does not change . ⢠The TV Screen setting in the Initial Settings menu is incorrect. See page 51 for how to set it correctly for you r TV/monitor . Picture disturbance during playback or the picture is dark. ⢠This player is compatible with Macro-Vision System copy guard. Some discs include a copy prevention signal, and when this type of disc is played back, stripes etc., may appear on some sections of the picture depending on the TV . This is not a malfunction . ⢠Due to the player âÂÂs copy protecti on circuits, connection of this device through a VCR or an AV selector may prevent recording or cause picture problems. This is not a mal function. ⢠Check whether the TV system is properly set (page 52). No audio , or audio is distorted. ⢠No audio is output during sl ow motion playback or when scanning discs othe r than audio CDs. ⢠Some DVD discs do not output digital audio: Switch your amplifier to the player âÂÂs analog outputs. ⢠Check that the disc is free from dust and dirt, and that it is not damaged (page 50). ⢠Check that all intercon nects are firmly inserted. ⢠Check that the plugs and terminal s are free of dirt, oxide, etc. and clean if necessar y . Also check the cab le for damage. ⢠Make sure the player âÂÂs output i s not connected to the amplifier âÂÂs phono (turntable) inputs. ⢠Check your amplifier/receiver âÂÂs settings (volum e, input function , speaker settings, etc.). The analog audio is OK, but there appears to be no digital audio sign al. ⢠Make sure that the Digi tal Out setting is set to On (page 38). ⢠Check that the Dolby Digital Out , DTS Ou t and MPEG Out settings (page 38) are suitable for your amplifier/receiver â check the instruction manual that came with your amplifier/receiver . ⢠SACDs and some DVD-Audio discs do not output digital audio. Listen through the player âÂÂs analog audio outputs. Noticeable difference in DVD and CD volume. ⢠This is due to differences in the audio format and is not a malfunction . Problem Remedy DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 55 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
09 56 En Cannot play multi- channel audio. ⢠Make su re that Audio O utput Mode is set to 5.1 Channel (page 44). ⢠Check that the Dolby Digital Out , DTS Ou t and MPEG Out settings (page 38) are suitable for your amplifier/receiver â check the instruction manual that came with your amplifier/receiver . ⢠DVD-Audio and SACDs do not outp ut multichannel digital au dio. Listen through the play erâÂÂs analog outputs. ⢠Check that the settings in the Speaker Installation screen are correct (page 49). ⢠Check the audio options avai lable from the disc menu. Cannot listen to high-sampling rate audio through the digital output. ⢠Make su re that Linear PCM Out is set to Down Sample Off (page 38). ⢠As a copy-protection measure, some DVDs do not output 96 kHz audio. In this case, even if s et to Do wn Sample Off , the player automatically outputs the audio at 48 kHz. This is not a malfunction . Cannot output 192 k Hz or 176.4 kHz digital audio. ⢠The player does not output digital audio at these sampling rates. The digital output is automatically downsampled. Cannot outp ut 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz digital audio . ⢠Check that Linear PCM Out is set to Down Sample Off (page 38). ⢠Some discs are digital copy protected and do not output high sampling rate digital audio. In this case the output is automatically downsampled. No DTS audio ou tput. ⢠If this unit is connected to a non-DTS compatible amplifi er or decoder using a digital audio cable, set DTS Out to DTS > PCM (page 38). If you do not do this, nois e will be output when you play a DTS disc. ⢠If this uni t is connected to a DTS -compatible amplif ier or decode r using a digital audio cable, check the amplifier settings, and that the cable is properly connected. Audio mi x does not sound right or sounds in complete (for example, inaudib le dialog). ⢠Make sure that Audio O utput M ode is set to 2 Channel if youâÂÂve connected to the stereo inputs on your amplifier or TV. The audio recorded on a Super VCD disc is n ot output properly. ⢠If the audio is switched to [2] when playing a Super VCD that contains only one stereo soundtrack, there may be no soun d at all. P ress AUDIO to change the soundtrack. CanâÂÂt hear effect of Virtu al Surrou nd. ⢠Virtual Sur round does not wo rk with SACD or DVD-Audio. ⢠The Virtual Sur round effect is only output through the AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) FRONT L/R analog audio outputs. ⢠Make sure that Aud io Output Mode is set to 2 Channel (page 4 4). ⢠The effectiveness of V irtual Su rround varies with the disc. Problem Remedy DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 56 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
09 57 En HDMI troubleshooting Problem Remedy No HDMI audio outp ut. ⢠Check whet her or not HDMI Out is set to Of f (page 38). ⢠This unit has been designed to be compliant with HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Inter face). Dependi ng on the component you have connected, un reliable signal transfers may result. ⢠If the front panel HDMI indicator is lit: â Y ou wonâÂÂt hear any sound from the HDMI output if the source component is only DVI/HDCP-compatible. ⢠If the front panel HDMI indicator is unlit then: â Make sure that youâÂÂve sele cted this player as the HDMI input in the settings for the component youâÂÂre using. Y ou may need to refer to the instruction manual of the component to do this. â Check that the HDMI cable is connected properly and that the cable isnâÂÂt damaged. â Check that components connected using the HDMI interface are switched on and HDMI compatible. No HDMI vi deo output. ⢠Make sure that youâÂÂve s elected this player as the HDMI input in the settings for the component youâÂÂre using. You may need to refer to the instruction manual of the component to do this. ⢠Check that the HDMI cable is connected properly and that the cable isnâÂÂt damaged. ⢠Check that components connected using the HDMI interface are switched on and HDMI compatible. ⢠This unit has been designed to be compliant with HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface). Depending on t he component you have c onnected, using a DVI connection may r esult in unreliable si gnal transfers. ⢠Make sure the resolution on th is player matches that of the component you have connected using HDMI. See HDMI Resolution on page 39 to change the HDMI resolution. See Resetting the output resolution to the default setting with HDMI connection on page 15 if you want to reset the output resolution. No multichannel HDMI audio. ⢠Make sure the HDMI Out s etting i s set to Auto, Au to (DSD) or LPCM (5.1CH) (page 38). See als o About the HDMI audio output settings on page 46 and HDMI output with DVD-Audio and SACD sources on page 47. No sound is output from the AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) jack when connected via HDMI. ⢠Check whether or not HDMI Out is set to Off . (See HDMI Out on page 38.) Componen t Out cannot be set to Interlace. ⢠You can use the Interlace setting if the HDMI Resol ution is set to 720x480i (NTSC)/720x576i (PA L) (page 39). DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 57 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
09 58 En USB troubleshoo ting Note ⢠Static electricity or other exte rnal influences ma y cause malfun c tioning of this unit. In this case, unplug the power cord and th en plug back in. This will usual ly reset the unit for pr oper operation. If this doe s not co rrect the pro blem, please consult your nearest Pionee r service center. Glossary A connected DVI com ponent (with HDCP) doe snâÂÂt work with this player. ⢠This unit has been designed to be compliant with HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface). Depending on t he component you have c onnected, using a DVI connection may r esult in unreliable si gnal transfers. Problem Remedy Problem Remedy USB mass storage device is not recognized by the system. ⢠Make sure you have comple tely inserted the USB connector to this unit. ⢠Check that the memor y format is F A T16 or F A T32. ⢠USB devices with an intern al USB hub are not supported. Files donâÂÂt show up in th e Navigator/Photo Browser. ⢠The files must have the correct file extens ion (page 6). ⢠Make sure the f ile per missi on ha snâÂÂt been restricted (through a password, etc.). CanâÂÂt play WMA or MPEG-4 AAC files. ⢠The f iles were re corded usi ng DRM (digit al rights management) or FairPlay copy-protection. This is not a malfunction . Bonus Group (DVD-Audio only) An âÂÂextraâ group on some DVD- Audio discs that requires a key number to access. Brows able pictures (DVD-Audio only) A feature of some DVD-Audio discs in which the user can browse still pictures recorded on the disc as the audio is played. DRM DRM (digital rights management) copy protection is a technology designed to prevent unauthor ized copyin g by restricting playback, etc. of compressed audio files on devices other than the PC (or other recording equipment) used to record it. F or detailed information , please see the instruction manuals or he lp files that came with your PC and/or software. DSD (Direct Stream Digital) The Digital Audio encoding system found on SACDs, that expresses the audio signals by the pulse density of one bit data. DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 58 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
09 59 En EXIF (Exchan geable Image Fi le) A file format developed by FUJIFILM for digital still cameras. Digital cameras from various manufacturers use this compressed file format which carries date, time and thumbnail in formation, as well as the picture data. HDMI HDMI (High-Definiti on Multimedia Inter face) i s a high-speed digital inter face which has th e capability to support standard, enhanced, or high-defini tion video plus standard to multi-channel surround-sound audio on a single digital connection. HDMI features include uncompressed digital video, a bandwidth of up to 5 gigabytes per second and communication between the AV s o u r c e a n d AV d e v i c e s s u c h as DTVs. ISO 9660 format International standard for the volume and file structure of CD-R OM di scs. MPEG-4 AAC MPEG-4 AAC is a compressed stereo audio file format. F iles are recognized by the extension âÂÂ.m4aâÂÂ. Note that some f iles purchased with copyright protection (such as files from the iT unes store) may not playback. MPEG audio An audio format used on Vid eo CD / Su pe r V C Ds a nd some DVD discs. Packed PCM (DVD-Audio only) A lossless compression system that enables more PCM audio to be stored on a DVD-Audio disc than would otherwise be possible. PBC (PlayBack Control) A system of navigating a Video CD/Sup er VCD through on-scr een menus re corded onto the disc. PCM (Pulse Code Modu lation) Digital audio encoding system found on CDs. Good quality , but requires a lot of data compared to Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG encoded audio. Progressive scan video All the lines that make up a video picture are updated in one pass (compared to interlace which takes two passes to update the whole picture). Super Au dio CD (SACD) Super Audio CD is a high quality audio disc format that can accommodate high sampling rate stereo and multi- channel audio, as well as conventional CD audio all on the same disc. Sampling frequency The rate at which sound is measured to be turned into digital audio data. The higher the rate, the better the sound quality . CD is 44.1 kHz; DVD can be up to 96 kHz. WMV WMV is an acr onym for Windows Media Video and refers to a video compression technology developed by Microsoft Corporation. Files are recognized by the file extension âÂÂ.wmvâÂÂ. DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 59 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
09 60 En Language code list Language (Language code letter), Language cod e Country/Area code list Country/Area, Country/Area co de, Country/Area code letter Japanese (ja), 1001 English (en), 0514 French ( fr), 0618 German (de), 0405 Italian (it), 0920 Spanish (es), 0519 Chinese (zh), 2608 Dutch (nl), 1412 Portuguese (pt), 1620 Swedish (sv), 1922 Russian (ru), 1821 Korean (ko), 1115 Greek (el), 0512 Afar (a a), 0101 Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Afrikaans (af), 0106 Amharic (am), 0113 Arabic (ar), 0118 Assamese (as), 0119 Aymara (ay), 0125 Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Bashkir (ba), 0201 Byelorussian (be), 0205 Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Bihari (bh), 0208 Bislama (bi), 0209 Bengali (bn), 0214 Tibetan (bo ), 0215 Breton (br), 0218 Catalan (ca), 0301 Corsican (co), 0315 Czech (cs), 0319 Welsh (cy), 0325 Danish (da), 0401 Bhutani (dz), 0426 Esperanto (eo), 05 15 Estonian (et), 0520 Basque (eu), 0521 Persian (fa), 0601 Finnish (fi), 0609 Fiji (fj), 0610 Faroese (fo), 0615 Frisian (fy), 0625 Irish (ga), 0701 Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704 Galician (gl), 0712 Guarani (gn), 0714 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Hausa (ha), 0801 Hindi (hi), 0809 Croat ian (hr) , 0818 Hung arian (h u), 0821 Armenian (hy), 0825 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Interlingue (ie), 0905 Inupiak (ik), 0911 Indonesian (in), 0914 Iceland ic (is), 0919 Hebrew (iw), 0923 Yiddish (ji), 1 009 Javane se (j w), 1023 Georgian (ka), 1101 Kazakh (kk), 1111 Greenlandic (kl), 1112 Cambo dian (km) , 1113 Kannada (kn), 1114 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Kirghiz (ky), 1125 Latin (la), 1201 Lingala (ln), 1214 Laothian (lo), 1215 Lithuanian (lt), 1220 Latvian (lv), 1222 Malagasy (mg), 1307 Maori (mi), 1309 Macedonian (mk), 1311 Malayalam (ml), 1312 Mongolian (mn), 1314 Moldavian (mo), 1315 Marathi (mr), 1318 Malay (ms), 1319 Maltese (mt), 1320 Burmes e (my), 1325 Nauru (na), 1401 Nepali (ne), 1405 Norwegian (no), 1415 Occitan (oc), 1503 Oromo (om), 1513 Oriya (or), 1518 Panjabi (pa), 1601 Polish (pl), 1612 Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619 Quechua (qu), 1721 Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813 Kirundi (rn), 1814 Roma nian (ro ), 1815 Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823 Sanskrit (sa), 1901 Sindhi (sd), 1904 Sangho (sg), 1907 Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908 Sinhalese (si), 1909 Slovak (sk), 1911 Slovenian (sl), 1912 Samoan (sm), 1913 Shona (sn), 1914 Somali (so), 1915 Albanian (sq), 19 17 Serbian (sr), 1918 Siswati (ss), 1919 Sesotho (st), 1920 Sundanese (su), 1921 Swahili (sw), 1923 Tamil (ta), 2001 Telugu (te), 2005 Tajik (tg), 2007 Thai (th), 2008 Tigrinya (ti), 2009 Turkmen (tk), 2011 Tagalog (tl), 2012 Setswana (tn), 2014 Tonga (to), 2015 Turkish (tr), 2018 Tsonga (ts ), 2019 Tatar (tt), 2020 Twi (tw), 2023 Ukrainian (uk), 2111 Urdu (ur), 2118 Uzbek (uz), 2126 Vietnamese (vi), 2209 Volapük ( vo), 2215 Wolof (wo), 2315 Xhosa (xh), 2408 Yoruba (yo), 2515 Zulu (zu), 2621 Argentina, 0118 , ar Australia, 0121 , au Austria, 0120 , at Belgium, 0205 , be Brazil, 0218 , br Canada, 0301 , ca Chile, 03 12 , cl China, 0314 , cn Denmark, 0411 , dk Finland , 0609 , fi Franc e, 0618 , fr Germany, 0405 , de Hong Kong, 0811 , hk India, 0914 , in Indonesia, 09 04 , id Italy, 0920 , it Japan, 1016 , jp Republic of Korea, 11 18, kr Malaysia, 1325 , my Mexico, 1324 , mx Netherlands, 1412 , nl New Zealand, 1426 , nz Norway, 1415 , no Pakistan, 1611 , pk Philippines, 1608 , ph Portugal, 1620 , pt Russian Federat ion, 1821 , ru Singapore, 1907 , sg Spain, 0519 , es Sweden, 1905 , se Switzerland, 0308 , ch Taiwan, 2023 , tw Thailand, 2008 , th United Kingdom, 0702 , gb USA, 2119 , us DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 60 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
09 61 En Specific ations General Power requirements . . . . AC 110 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 W Power consumption (standby) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.8 W Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7 kg Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . 420 mm (W) x 49.5 mm (H) x 215.5 mm (D) Operating temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 ðC to 35 ðC Operating humidity . . . . 5 % to 85 % (no condens a tion) Component video output Y (luminance) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 é ) P B (color) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75 é ) P R (color) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75 é ) Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R CA S-video output Y (luminance) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 é ) C (color) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 mVp-p (75 é ) Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-video Video output Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 é ) Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R CA Audio output (1 stereo pair) Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . During audio output 2 0 0m V r m s ( 1k H z , â 2 0d B ) Number of channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA Audio output (multi-channel / L, R, C, SW, SL, SR) Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . During audio output 200 mVrms (1 kHz, âÂÂ20 dB) Number of channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA HDMI output HDMI output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 pin Digital audio c haracteristics Frequency response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Hz to 44 kHz S/N ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 dB Dynamic range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 dB Total harmonic distort ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 .0023 % Wow and flutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L imit of measurement (ñ0.001 % W. PEAK) or lower Digital output s Coaxial digital output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R CA Optical digital output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optical Accessorie s Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 AA/R6P dry cell batteri es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Audio/video cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Power cable Central Amer ican, South American, and Taiwan model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Front panel button names stic ker (Taiwan mode ls only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Remote control overlay (Taiw an mode ls only ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Operating instructions The specifica tions an d design o f this product a re subject to change without noti ce, due to im provemen t. DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 61 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
<VRB1500-A> Printed in Thailand <08F00001> Published b y Pioneer Cor poration. Cop yr ight é 2008 Pioneer Cor poration. All rights reser ved. PIONEER CORPORA TION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, T okyo 153-8654, J apan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P .O . BO X 1540, Long Beach, Calif or nia 90801-1540, U .S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANAD A, INC. 300 Allstate P arkway , Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411 PIONEER EUROPE NV Hav en 1087, K eetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIA CENTRE PTE. L TD . 253 Ale xandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS A USTRALIA PTY . L TD . 178-184 Boundar y Road, Braeside, Victor ia 3195, Austr alia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V . Blvd.Manuel A vila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Me xico ,D .F . 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 K002_B_En DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 64 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
2 En Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly . After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (ser vicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. CAUTION: TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE P ARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN IMPOR T ANT D3-4-2-1-1_En-A CAUTION This product is a class 1 laser product, but this product contains a laser diode higher than Class 1. T o ensure continued safety , do not remove any covers or attempt to gain access to the inside of the product. Refer all servicing to qualified personnel. The following caution label appears on your unit. Location: inside of the unit CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT D3-4-2-1-8_B_En Singapore and T aiwanese model only W ARNING This equipment is not waterproof. T o prevent a fire or shock hazard, do not place any container filled with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain or moisture. D3-4-2-1-3_B_En W ARNING The voltage of the available power supply differs according to country or r egion. Be sure that the power supply voltage of the area wher e this unit will be used meets the requir ed voltage (e.g., 230 V or 120 V) written on the rear panel. D3-4-2-1-4_A_En Before plugging in for the first time, read the following section carefully . Operating Environment Operating environment temperature and humidity : 5 úC to 35 úC ( 41 úF to 95 úF); less than 85 %RH (cooling vents not blocked) Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or strong artificial light) D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En W ARNING T o pr event a fire hazard, do not place any naked flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the equipment. D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En VENTILA TION CAUTION When installing this unit, make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to impr ove heat radiation (at least 10 cm at top, 10 cm at rear , and 10 cm at each side). W ARNING Slots and openings in the cabinet are pr ovided for ventilation to ensure r eliable operation of the product, and to pr otect it from overheating. T o prevent fir e hazard, the openings should never be blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the equipment on thick carpet or a bed. D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En DV610AV_IBD_ EN.book 2 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
3 En NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to P art 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful inter ference to radio communications. However , there is no guarantee that inter ference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful inter ference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the inter ference by one or more of the following measures: â Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. â Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver . â Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. â Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. D8-10-1-2_En CAUTION: This product satisfies FCC regulations when shielded cables and connectors are used to connect the unit to other equipment. T o prevent electromagnetic inter ference with electric appliances such as radios and televisions, use shielded cables and connectors for connections. D8-10-3a_En Information to User Alteration or modifications carried out without appropriate authorization may invalidate the user âÂÂs right to operate the equipment. D8-10-2_En CAUTION : USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MA Y RESUL T IN HAZARDOUS RADIA TION EXPOSURE. CAUTION : THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL INCREASE EYE HAZARD. D6-8-2-1_En If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be per formed only by qualified ser vice personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make sure it is properly disposed of after removal. The equipment should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En CAUTION The î ST ANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not completely shut off all power from the AC outlet. Since the power cord ser ves as the main disconnect device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from the AC outlet to shut down all power . Therefore, make sure the unit has been installed so that the power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in case of an accident. T o avoid fire hazard, the power cord should also be unplugged from the AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En This product is for general household purposes. Any failure due to use for other than household purposes (such as long-term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires repair will be charged for even during the warranty period. K041_En POWER-CORD CAUTION Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cords. The power cords should be routed such that they are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check the power cord once in a while. When you find it damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized ser vice center or your dealer for a replacement. S002_En This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. This product includes F ontAv enue î f onts licenced by NEC Cor poration. F ontA venue is a registered trademark of NEC Cor poration. For Australia Model For T aiwan exclusively T aiwanese two pin flat-bladed plug K056_En DV610AV_IBD_ EN.book 3 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
4 En Contents 01 Before you start Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 WhatâÂÂs in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Hints on in stalla tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Disc/content format playba ck compatib ility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 02 Connections Easy connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Connecting using the S-Video output . . . . 11 Connecting using the componen t video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Connecting to an AV receiver . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 03 Controls and displays Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Remote cont rol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 04 Getti ng start ed Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Using the on-screen displays . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Setting up the player for your TV . . . . . . . . 1 9 Setting the language of this playerâÂÂs on-screen displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Playing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 05 Playing discs Scanni ng discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Playing in slow motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Frame advance/frame reverse . . . . . . . . . . 24 Viewing a JPEG slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Browsing Discs with the Disc Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 5 Browsing Files with the Disc Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 6 Looping a se ction of a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Using repeat play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Using random play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Creating a pro gram list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Searchi ng a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Switching subtit les . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Switching audio language/channels . . . . . 31 Zooming the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1 Switc hing cam era angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Displaying disc information . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 06 USB playback Using the USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Recording the tracks of a music CD on a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 07 Audio Settings and Video Adjust menus Audio Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Video Adjust menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 08 Initial Settings menu Using the Initial Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . 37 Digital Audio Out settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Video Output settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Language settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Display settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Options settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Parent al Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 DTS Down mix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 About DivXî VOD content . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Speakers settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 HDMI output with DVD-Audio an d SACD sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 09 Additional information Taking care of your player an d discs . . . . . . 50 Screen sizes and disc formats . . . . . . . . . . 51 Setting the TV system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Resetting the player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 DVD-Video re gions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Selecting languages using th e language code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Language code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Country/Area code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Specific ations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 DV610AV_IBD_ EN.book 4 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
01 5 En Chapter 1 Before you start Features ⢠PureCinema Prog ressive Scan video When connected to a progressive scan-compatible TV or monitor using the component video ou tputs, you can enjoy extremely stable, flicker free images, with the same frame refresh rate as the original movie. ⢠24-bi t/192 kHz compati ble DA C The on-board 24-bit/192 kHz DAC mean s that this player is fully co mpatible w ith high sampling -rate discs , capable of deliverin g exceptional sound qu ality in terms of dyn amic range, low-level resolution and high-fr equency detail. WhatâÂÂs i n the box Please confirm that the following accessories are in the box when you open it. ⢠Remote control ⢠AA/R6P dry cell batteries x 2 ⢠Audio/video cable (r ed/white/yellow plugs) ⢠Power cable ( Central American, South American and Taiwan model x2) ⢠Operating instructions x 2 ( Australian, Thailand and PX model x 1) ⢠Front panel button names stic ker ( Taiwan mode ls on ly ) â Chine se languag e button names for the front p anel controls. ⢠Remote control overla y ( Taiw an mod els only ) â Place the overla y on the remote control to be able to read the b uttons i n Chin ese. Putting the batteries in the remote ⢠Open the battery compartment cover and insert the batteries as shown. Use two AA/R6P batteries and follow the indications ( ï« , ïª ) inside the compartment. Close the cover when yo uâÂÂre finished. When closing the cove r, align the notch and tab, and slide in the direction indicated by the arrow ï² . Important Incorrect use o f batteries can result in hazards such as leakage and bursting. Please observe the followin g: ⢠DonâÂÂt mix new and old batterie s together . ⢠DonâÂÂt use differen t kinds of battery together â although they may look similar, different batteries may have different voltages. ⢠Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each battery match the indications in the battery compartme nt. ⢠Remove batteries from equipmen t that isnâÂÂt going to be used for a month or more. ⢠When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental pub lic instruc tionâÂÂs rules that apply in your country/are a. DV610AV_IBD_ EN.book 5 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
01 6 En ⢠Do not use or store batterie s in direct sunlight or other ex cessively hot place, such as inside a car or near a heater. This can cause ba tteries to leak, overhea t, explode or ca tch fire. It can a lso reduce the life or performance of batteries. Hints on installation We want you to enjo y using this product f or years to come, so please use the following guidelines when choo sing a su itable loc ation: Do... ⢠Use in a w ell-ventila ted r oom. ⢠Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table, shelf or stereo rack. DonâÂÂt... ⢠Use in a place ex posed to high temperatures or humid ity, includ ing near radiators and other heat-generating appliances. ⢠Place on a window sill or a place where th e player will be exposed to direct sunlight. ⢠Use in an exce ssively dusty or damp environment. ⢠Place directly on top of a n am plifier, or other component in your stereo system that becomes hot in use. ⢠Use near a television or mon itor as you may experience interference â especially if the television uses an in door antenna. ⢠Use in a kitchen or oth er room where the player may be exposed to smoke or steam. ⢠Use on a thick rug or carp et, or cover with cloth â this may prevent proper cooling of the unit. ⢠Place on an unstable sur face, or one that is not la rge enough to suppo rt all four of the unitâÂÂs feet. Disc/content format playba ck compatibility This player is compati ble with a wide range of disc types (m edia) and formats. Playable disc s will generally feature one of the following logo s on the disc and/or disc packaging. Note however that some disc types, such as record able CD and DVD, may be in an unplayable forma t â see below for further compatib ility info rmation. Please also no te that recordable discs canno t be recorded using this player. ⢠This unit wi ll play DVD R/ RW discs. ⢠is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Co rporation. ⢠is a trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation. ⢠Also compatib le with KODAK Picture CD. DVD- Video DVD -R DVD-RW DVD-Audio Video CD Audio CD CD-R CD-RW Su pe r Audio CD F ujicolo r CD DV610AV_IBD_ EN.book 6 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
01 7 En This player supp orts the IECâÂÂs Super VCD standard. Compared to the Video C D standard, Super VCD offers superior p icture quality, and a llows two stereo soundtracks to be recorded. Super VCD also supp orts the widescreen size. About DualDisc p layback A DualDisc is a new two -sided disc, one side of which contains DVD co ntent video, audio, etc. while th e other side contain s non-DVD content such as digital audio material. The non-DV D, audio si de of the disc is not compliant with the CD audio specif ication and therefore may no t play. The DVD side of a Dual Disc plays in this product. For more detailed information on the DualDisc specification, please refer to the disc manufacturer or disc retailer. CD-R/-RW compatibility â¢C o m p a t i b l e f o r m a t s : CD audio, Video CD/ Super VCD, ISO 9660 CD-ROM* containing MP3, WMA , MPEG-4 AAC, JPEG or Div X video/WMV files * ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 c ompliant. CD physical fo rmat: Mode1, Mode2 XA Form1. Romeo and Jo liet file system s are both compat ible with this pl ayer. ⢠Multi -session pl ayback: No ⢠Unfinalized disc playback: No ⢠File structure (may differ): Up to 299 folders on a disc; up to 648 folders and files (combined) within each folder DVD R/ RW compatib ility Only DVD R/DVD RW discs reco rded in âÂÂVideo Mode (DVD Video Mode)â which have been finalized, can be played back. Howeve r, some editing made during the recording may not be played back accurately. DVD-R/- RW compatib ility ⢠Compatible formats: DVD-Video, Video Recordi ng (VR )* * Edit po ints may not pl ay exactly as edited; screen may go momentarily blank at edited points. ⢠Unfinalized p layback: No ⢠MP3/WMA/MP EG-4 AAC/JPEG or DivX video/WMV file playba ck on DVD-R/ -RW: Yes ⢠This label indic ates playback compatibil ity with DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode (Vid eo Recor ding format). However, for discs recorded with a record- only-once encrypted program, playback can only be achieved using a CPRM compatible devi ce. Compressed audio compatibility ⢠Compatible forma ts: MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3), Windows Media Audio (WMA), MPEG-4 AAC ⢠Sampling rates: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz ⢠Bit-rates: Any (128 kbps or higher recommended) ⢠VBR (Variable Bit Rate) MP3/WM A/ MPEG-4 AAC playback: No ⢠WMA lossless enco ding compatible: No ⢠DRM (Digital Rights Management) compatible: No (DRM-protected audio fil es will not play in this player â see also DRM in the Glossary o n page 58) ⢠File extensions: .mp3, .wma, .m4a (these must be used for the player to recognize MP3, WMA an d MPEG-4 A AC files â do not use for other file types) Su pe r VCD DV610AV_IBD_ EN.book 7 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
01 8 En About MPEG-4 AAC Advanced Audio Coding (AAC) is at the core of the MPEG-4 AAC standard, wh ich incor porates MP EG-2 AAC, fo rming the basi s of the MPEG -4 audio comp ression technology. The file format and ext ension used dep end on the applic ation used to encode the AAC file. This unit plays back AAC files enco ded by iTunes î bearing the extension âÂÂ. m4aâÂÂ. DRM-protected files will not play, and fil es encoded with some versions of iTunes î may not play, or filenames may display in correctly. ⢠Apple and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc., registe red in the U. S. and other countries. Windows Media⢠Audio (WMA) compatibility This player can playback WMA content. WMA is an acronym fo r Windows Media Audio and refers to an a udio compr ession technolo gy developed by Micr osoft Corporation. WMA content can be encoded by using Windows Media Player for Wi nd ows XP, Windows Media Player 9 or Windows Media Pla yer 10 series. ⢠Windows Media is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation. ⢠This product include s technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and cann ot be used or distribute d without a license from Microsoft Li censing, Inc. About DivX video DivX is a media te chnology cre ated by DivX, Inc. DivX media files c ontain not only video but also includ e advanced media features l ike menus, subtitles, and alternate audiotracks. This player can play Di vX videos recorded on DVDs, CDs, or USB stora ge devices. Keeping the same terminology as DVD-Video, individual DivX video file s are ca lled âÂÂT itlesâÂÂ. DivX videos will be pl ayed in alphab etical order. ⢠DivX, DivX Ultra Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under l icense. Displaying externa l subtitle files The font sets listed below ar e available for external subtitle f iles. Yo u can se e the pr oper font set on-screen by setting the Subtitle Language (in Language setting s on pa ge 40) to match th e subtitle f ile. This player supports the foll owing language groups: ⢠Some external subtitle files may be displayed incorrectly or not at all. Group 1 Albanian (sq), Basque (eu), Catalan (ca), Danish (da), Dut ch (nl), English (en), F aroese (fo), F innish (fi), F rench (fr), German (de), Icelandic (is), Irish (ga), Italian (it), Norwegian (no), P ortuguese (pt), Rhaeto-Romanic (rm), Scottish (gd), S panish (es) , Swedish (s v) Group 2 Albanian (sq), Croatian (hr), Czech (cs), Hungarian (hu), P olish (pl), Romanian (ro), Slovak (sk), Slovenian (sl) Group 3 Bulgarian (bg), Byelorussian (be), Macedonian (mk), Russian (ru), Serbian (sr), Ukrainian (u k) Group 4 Hebrew (iw), Yiddish (ji) Group 5 T urkish (tr) DV610AV_IBD_ EN.book 8 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
01 9 En ⢠For externa l subtitle f iles th e followin g subtitle format fi lename extensions are supported (please note that these files are not show n within the dis c naviga tion menu): .srt, .sub, .ssa, .smi ⢠The filename of the movie file h as to be repeated at the beginning of the filename for the external subtitle file. ⢠The number of ex ternal subtitle files which can be switched for the same movie file is limited to a maximum of 10. DivX video compatibil ity ⢠Officia l DivX î Ultra Certified produc t. ⢠Plays all versions of DivX î video (including DivX î 6) with enhanced playback of DivX î media file s and the DivX î Media Fo rmat. ⢠File extensions: .avi and .divx (these mu st be used for the player to recognize DivX video files). Note that all files with the .avi extension are rec ognized as MPEG4, but not all of these are necessarily DivX video files and therefor e may not be playable on this player. About Windows Media Vid eo (WMV) WMV is an acronym for Windows Media Video and refers to a video comp ression technolo gy developed by Micr osoft Corporation. WMV content can be encoded by using Windows Media Encoder. ⢠This play er is compat ible with W MV9 files that are encoded by using the Windows Media Encoder 9 Ser ies, with .wmv as an extension. ⢠Compatible with size under 720x4 80 pixels/ 720x576 pixels. ⢠Advanced Profile is not supp orted. ⢠DRM-protec ted video files will not play in this player. JPEG file co mpatibility ⢠Compatible formats: Basel ine JPEG and EXIF 2.2* still image fi les up to a resolution of 3072 x 2048. * File form at used by di gital still c ameras. ⢠Progressive JPEG compatible: No ⢠File extension s: .jpg (mus t be u sed for the player to recognize J PEG files â do not use for other file types) PC-created disc compatibility Discs re corded usi ng a person al computer may not be playabl e in this un it due t o the setting of the application soft ware used to create the disc. In these particula r instances, check with the software publisher for more detailed information. Discs recorded in packet write mode (UD F format) are not c ompatible with this player. Check the DVD-R/-RW or CD-R/-RW software disc boxes for additi onal compatibility information. DV610AV_IBD_ EN.book 9 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
02 10 En Chapter 2 Connections Easy connections Important ⢠Before making or changing any connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cable from the AC outlet. ⢠The setup described here is a basic setup that al lows you to pl ay discs using just the cables supplied with the player. In this setup, stereo au dio is played through the speakers in your TV. ⢠This player is equipped with copy protection technology. Do not connect this player to your TV via a VCR using audio/video cables, as the pict ure from this player will not appear properly on your TV. (Th is player may also no t be comp atible with some combinat ion TV/VCRs f or the same reason; refer to the m anufacturer f or more information.) 1 Connect the VIDEO OUT and AUDIO OUT L/R jacks to a set of A/V inputs on your TV. Use the supplied audio/video cabl e, connecting the red and white plugs to the audio outputs and the yellow plug to the video output. Make sure you m atch up the left a nd right audio outputs with th eir correspon ding inputs for correc t stereo sound. See below if you want to use a compo nent, S-Video cable for the video co nnection. 2 Connect the suppli ed AC power cable to the AC IN in let, then plug into a power outlet. Note ⢠Before unplug ging the player from the power outlet, make sure you first switch it into standby using eith er the front panel ïµ STANDBY/ON button, or the remote control, and wait of the -OFF- message to disappear from the playerâÂÂs display. ⢠For the above reason s, do not plug this player into a switche d power supply found on some amplifiers and AV receiver s. AC IN DIGITAL AUDIO OUT OPTICAL COAXIAL P R P B Y COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) SL SR HDMI OUT SW C L R To audio/video inputs To power outlet Y ellow White Red TV DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 10 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
02 11 En Connecting using the S-Video output If your TV (or other equipment) has an S -Video (S1) input, you can use the S-Video output on this player instead of the standard (composite) output for a better quality picture. ⢠Use an S-Video cabl e (not supplied) to connect the S-VIDEO OUT to an S-Video input on your TV (or mo nitor or AV receiver). Line up the small triangle above the jack with th e s a m e ma r k o n th e p l u g b e f o r e p l u g g i n g i n . Connecting using the component video output You can use the co mponent video output instead of the standard video out jack to connect this player to your TV (or other equipm ent). This s hould give you the be st quality picture from the th ree types of video output av ailable. ⢠Use a component vide o cable (not supplied) to conn ect the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks to a component video input on you r TV, monitor or AV receiver. Watching progressive scan video from the component video outputs This player can output progressive scan video from the co mponent vi deo output. Compared to interlace video, pro gressive scan video effectively doubles the scan ning rate of the picture, resulting in a very stable, flicker-free image. To set up the player fo r use with a progressive scan TV, see Video Output settings on page 39. When the player is set to output pro gressive scan video, the PRGSVE indicat or ligh ts in the front p anel dis play. P R P B Y COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) SL SR HDMI OUT SW C L R TV To S-Video input P R P B Y COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) SL SR HDMI OUT SW C L R TV To component video input DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 11 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
02 12 En Important ⢠If you con nect a TV tha t is not c ompatible with a progressive scan signal and switch the player to progressive, yo u will not be able to see any pi cture at all. In th is case, switch everything off and reco nnect using the supplied video cable (see Easy connections on page 10), then switch back to Interlace (see below). Switching the video output to int erlace using the front panel c ontrols Switch the player to standby then, using the front p anel control s, press ïµ STA NDBY/ON while pressing ï¯ to switch the player back to Interlace . ⢠If the player is connected using HDMI, disconnect the HDMI cable before resetting the player to interl ace output. (If left connected, the HDMI output resolution will be reset to its defaul t â see Resetting the output resolution to the default setting with HDMI connection on page 15.) Connecting to an AV receiver You can connec t this player to your AV receiver using the multicha nnel analog outp uts or one of the dig ital outputs. In addition to these connections, you sho uld also connect the 2 cha nnel analog o utputs for compat ibility w ith all d iscs. YouâÂÂll probably also want to connect a video output to your AV receiver. You can use any of the video outputs available on this player (the illustration shows a st andard (composite) connectio n). 1 Connect the anal og AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) FRONT L/R and VIDEO OU T jacks on this player to a set of analog aud io and video inputs o n your AV receive r. 2 Connect the AV receive râÂÂs video output to a video inpu t on your TV. You can also use the S-Video or c omponent video jacks to connect to the AV re ceiver if you prefer. Tip ⢠You usually have to connect the same kind of video cable be tween your DVD pla yer and AV receiver, and between your AV receiver and TV. HDMI STANDBY/ON ïµ STANDBY/ON ï¯ P R P B Y COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) SL SR HDMI OUT SW C L R AV r eceiver To audio/video inputs DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 12 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
02 13 En Connecting the multichannel analog outputs If your AV rece iver has 5.1 channel analo g inputs, we recommend co nnecting this player to it usi ng the mul tichannel a nalog ou tputs. Doing this will ensure that you can enjoy all kinds of disc, including Dol by Digital and DTS DVD-Video discs, as well as high sampling rate and multic hannel DVD-Audio and SAC D discs. ⢠Connect the multi -channel audio outputs on this player to the mul ti-channel audio inputs on your AV receiver. ItâÂÂs convenient to use three stereo audio cables; one for the FRO NT , one fo r the SURROUN D and one f or the CENTER and SUBWOOFER channe ls. You can also use the S-Video or compo nent video jacks to connect to th e AV receiver if you prefer. Tip ⢠After connect ing up and switching on, yo u should change the Audio Output Mode setting in the Initial Setup menu from the default 2 Channel to 5.1 Chan nel . See also Audio Output Mo de on page 44. Connecting the digital output This pl ayer has both o ptical and coaxial-t ype digital audio outp uts for connection to an AV receiver. Connect whichever is co nvenient. Depending on the capabilities of you r AV receiver, you might have to set up th is player to output o nly digi tal audio in a comp atible format . See Digital Audio O ut settings on page 38 and refer to the op erating instructions that came with yo ur AV receiver. Note that SACD au dio is not output through these jacks , so this co nnection shou ld be in additi on to, rather than ins tead of, a 5 .1 channel analo g connection. ⢠Connect one of the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jacks on this play er to a digital input on your AV recei ver. For an optical conn ection, use an optical ca ble (not supplied) to connect the OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT ja ck to an optic al input on your AV receiver. For a co axial connec tion, use a coa xial cabl e (similar to the supplied video cable) to connect the COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO O UT jack to a coaxial i nput on yo ur AV receiver. P R P B Y COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) SL SR HDMI OUT SW C L R AV r eceiver To multi-channel audio inputs AC IN DIGITAL AUDIO OUT OPTICAL COAXIAL AV r eceiver To coaxial/optical digital input DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 13 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
02 14 En Connecting using HDMI If you have a HDMI equipped monitor or display, you can connect it to this player using a commercial ly available HDMI cable. The HDMI connect or outputs uncompressed digital video, as well as almo st every kind of digital audio that the pla yer is com patible with, including DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, SAC D, Video CD/Su per VCD, CD, WMA, MP3, MPEG-4 AAC, DivX video and WMV. ⢠Use an HDMI cable (not supp lied) to connect the HDMI OUT interconnect on this play er to an HDMI in terconnect on a HDMI-compatible display. The arrow on the cable connector body sho uld be face up for correct alignment wit h the connector on the player . Note ⢠This unit has been designed to be compliant with HDMI (Hig h-Definition Multimedi a Interface). Dep ending on the component you h ave connected, using a DVI connecti on may result in unrelia ble signal transfers. ⢠When you change the compon ent connected to the HDMI output, you will also need to change the HDMI se ttings to match the new compo nent (see HDMI Out on page 38, HDM I Resolution on page 39 and HDMI Color on page 39 to do this). However, the settings for each component are then stored in memory (for up to 2 componen ts). ⢠The HDMI connection is compatib le with 2 channel li near PCM sign als (44.1 kHz to 192 kHz, 16 bit/20 bit/24 bit), and Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG audio bit stream, multi channel DS D, and mult i channel li near PCM signals, (5.1 channel signals up to 96 kHz, 16 bit/20 bit/24 bit). â Manufactured unde r license from Dol by Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, and the double-D symbo l are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. â Manufactured unde r license under U.S. Patent #âÂÂs: 5,451 ,942; 5,956,674; 5 ,974,380; 5,978,76 2; 6,226,616; 6,487 ,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registered trademarks and the DTS logos, Symbol and DTS 96/24 are trademarks of DTS, Inc. é 1996-200 7 DTS, Inc. All Rights R eserved. P R P B Y COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) SL SR HDMI OUT SW C L R HDMI-compatible display To HDMI interconnect DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 14 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
02 15 En About HD MI HDMI (Hi gh-Definit ion Mult imedia I nterface) supports both video an d audio on a sin gle digital connection for use with DVD players, DTV, set-top boxes, and other AV devices. HDMI was developed to provide the technologies of High-b andwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP) a s well as Di gital Visual Interface (DVI) in one specification . HDCP is u sed to protect di gital con tent transmitted and received by DVI-compliant displays. HDMI has the capability to support standard, enhanced, or high-defin ition video plus standard to multi-channel surround-so und audio. HDMI features include unco mpressed digital video, a bandwidth of up to fi ve gigaby tes per se cond (w ith HDT V signal s), one connector (instead of several cables and connectors), and communication between the AV source and AV devices such as DTVs. ⢠HDMI, the HD MI Logo and High-Definitio n Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered t rademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. Resetting the output r esolution to the default sett ing with HDMI connectio n Switch the player to standby then, using the front p anel control s, press ïµ STA NDBY/ON while pressing ï¯ to switch the player back to 720x480p (NTSC)/72 0x576p (PAL) . HDMI STANDBY/ON ïµ STANDBY/ON ï¯ DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 15 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
03 16 En Chapter 3 Controls and displays Front panel 1 ïµ STANDBY/ON (page 18) 2 Disc tray 3 ï¨ OPEN/CLOSE (page 20) 4D i s p l a y 5T O P M E N U (page 22) 6 ENTER & cursor buttons (page 18) 7M E N U (page 22) 8 RETURN (page 22) 9H O M E M E N U (page 18) 10 USB port (Type A) (page 32) 11 DVD/USB (page 32) 12 ï¤ (page 21) 13 ïÂÂ¥ (page 21) 14 ï§ (page 21) 15 ï¯ and ï° (page 21) 16 HDMI indicator Lights when this pla yer is recognized by another HDMl or DVI/HD CP compatible component. ï¨ î OPEN/CLOSE HDMI HOME MENU RETURN ENTER TOP MENU MENU USB DVD/USB STANDBY/ON 2 5 3 4 6 7 1 9 8 10 12 11 16 13 14 15 DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 16 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
03 17 En Remote control 1 ïµ STANDBY/ON (page 18) 2 AUDIO (page 31) 3 SUBTITL E (page 30) 4 Number buttons (page 21) 5T O P M E N U (page 22) 6 ENTER & cursor buttons (page 18) 7H O M E M E N U (page 18) 8 ï and ï±/ (pages 21 and 23) 9 ï¤ PLAY (page 21) 10 ï¯ PREV (page 21) 11 ïÂÂ¥ PAUS E (page 21) 12 USB REC (page 33) 13 PLAY MO DE (page 27) 14 ï¨ OPEN/CLOSE (pa ge 20) 15 ANGLE (pa ge 31) 16 DVD/USB (page 32) 17 CLEAR (page 29) 18 MENU (page 22) 19 RETURN (page 18) 20 ï® and /ï² (pages 21 and 23) 21 ï° NEXT (page 21) 22 ï§ STOP (page 21) 23 DISPLAY (page 31) 24 ZOOM (page 31) Using the remote control Keep in mind the following when using the remote co ntrol: ⢠Make su re that th ere are no obs tacles between the remo te and the remote sensor on the unit. ⢠The r emote has a ra nge of about 7 m. ⢠Remote operat ion may become unreliable if strong sunlight or fluorescent li ght is shining o n the unitâÂÂs remote se nsor. ⢠Remote controllers for different devices can interfere with each other. Avoid using remotes for other equipment loca ted close to this un it. ⢠Replace th e batteries when you notice a fall off in the ope rating range of the remote. ST ANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE 1 23 CLEAR USB DVD/ 4 5 6 7 89 0 TOP MENU MENU ENTER RETURN PLAY MODE ZOOM DISPLAY PLAY PREV PA USE DVD STOP NEXT HOME MENU REC USB 1 23 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 2 4 5 6 7 8 10 12 13 3 9 11 22 24 DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 17 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
04 18 En Chapter 4 Getting started Switching on After making sure that everything is connected properly and th at the player is plugged in, press ïµ STANDBY/ON on the front pa nel or remote control to switch the player on . Also, switch on your TV a nd make sure that it is set to the input you connected the DVD player to. FAQ ⢠My DVD play er switches on but the re is nothing disp layed on my TV. Make sure th at the TV is set to the correc t video input (not a TV channel ). For example, if you conne cted this player to the VIDEO 1 inputs on your TV, switc h your TV to VIDEO 1 . Note ⢠This player features a screen saver an d an auto power of f function. If the p layer is stopped and no button is pressed for around five minutes, the screen saver starts. If the disc tray is c losed but no disc is playing and no con trol is pr essed for about 30 minutes, the player automatically goes into standby. Using the on-screen displays For ease of use, this player ma kes extensive use of graphical on-screen displays (OSDs). All the scree ns are navigate d in basically th e same way, using the cursor buttons ( ï©/ïª /ï«/ ï¬ ) to change th e highlighted item and pressing ENTE R to se lect it. Note ⢠From here on in this m anual, the word âÂÂselectâ generally me ans use the cursor buttons to high light an item on-screen , then press ENT ER . HDMI STANDBY/ON ïµ STANDBY/ON Button What it does HOME ME NU Display/exit the on-screen display . ï©/ïª/ï«/ï¬ Changes the highlighted menu item. ENTER Selects the highlighted menu item. RETURN R eturns to the main menu without saving changes. TOP MENU MENU ENTER RETURN HOME MENU ï¨ î OPEN/CLOSE HOME MENU RETURN ENTER TOP MENU MENU USB DVD/USB ENTER HOME MENU RETURN DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 18 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
04 19 En Setting up the player for your TV If you have a wide screen (16:9) TV, you should setup the player so that the picture will be presented correctly. If you have a convention al (4:3) TV, you can leave the player on the default setting and move on to the next section . 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂInitial SettingsâÂÂ. 2 Select â TV Screenâ from the âÂÂVideo Outputâ settings. 3 If you have a wid escreen (16:9) TV, select âÂÂ16: 9 (Wide)â or âÂÂ16:9 (Compressed)âÂÂ. If you have a con ventional (4:3) TV, you can change the setting from 4:3 (Letter Box) to 4:3 (Pan & Scan) if you prefer. See Vide o Output settings on page 39 for more details. 4 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu screen. Setting the language of this playerâÂÂs on-screen displa ys This sets the language of the playerâÂÂs on-screen displays. 1 Press HOM E MENU and sel ect âÂÂInitial SettingsâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂOSD Languageâ from the âÂÂDisplayâ s ettings. Taiwanese model only: 3 Select a language. The on-sc reen langua ge will chan ge accordin g to your selection. 4 Press HOME MEN U to exit the menu screen. Initial Settings Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers TV Screen Component Out HDMI Resolution HDMI Color 4:3 (Letter Box) 4:3 (Pan&Scan) 16:9 (Wide) 16:9 (Compressed) Initial Settings Initial Settings Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers OSD Language Angle Indicator Initial Settings English français Español Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers OSD Language Angle Indicator Initial Settings English DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 19 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
04 20 En Playing discs The basic playba ck controls for playing DVD, SACD, CD, Video CD/Super VCD, DivX video/ WMV and MP3/WMA/M PEG-4 AAC discs are covered here. Further fun ctions are detailed in the next cha pter. For details on playing JPEG picture discs, see Viewing a JPE G slides how on page 24. Important ⢠Throughout this manual, the term âÂÂDVDâ means DVD-Video, DVD-Audio and DVD-R/-RW. If a fun ction is specific to a particula r kind of D VD disc, it is specifi ed. 1 If the player isnâÂÂt alread y on, press ïµ STANDBY/ON to switch it o n. If youâÂÂre playin g a DVD, disc con taining DivX video/WMV files or Video CD/Super VCD, a l s o t u r n o n y o u r T V a n d m a k e s u r e t h a t i t i s s e t to the correc t video inp ut. 2 Press ï¨ OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray. 3 Load a disc. Load a disc with the label side facing up, us ing the disc tray guide to a lign the disc (if yo uâÂÂre loading a double -sided DVD disc, load it with the side you want to play fac e down). 4 Press ï¤ PLAY to start playb ack. If youâ re playin g a DVD or Vid eo CD/ Super VCD, a n on-screen m enu may appear. See DVD and DivX d isc menus and Video C D/ Super VCD PBC menus o n p a g e 2 2 f o r m o r e o n how to nav igate thes e. ⢠If youâÂÂre playin g a containin g DivX video/ WMV files or MP3/WMA /MPEG-4 AAC audio files, it may take a few seconds before playback sta rts, etc. This is normal. ⢠Please see About DualDisc playback on page 7 if you want to play a DualDisc (DVD/ CD hybrid disc) . Note ⢠You may find with some DVD discs that some playback controls donâÂÂt work in certain parts of the dis c. This is n ot a malfunction. ⢠If a di sc contains a mi xture of movi e (DivX video/W MV) and other m edia file types (MP3, for example), first select whether to play the movie files ( DivX/ WMV ) or the other media file types ( MP3/ WMA/MPEG4 AAC/JPEG ) from the on-screen display. STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE 1 23 CLEAR USB DVD/ 4 5 6 7 89 0 TOP MENU MENU ENTER RETURN PLAY MODE ZOOM DISPLAY PLAY PREV PAUSE DVD STOP NEXT HOME MENU AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE REC USB DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 20 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
04 21 En Basic playback controls The table below shows the basic controls on the remote for playin g discs. The foll owing chapter covers other playback f eatures in more deta il. Resume and Last M emory With the exception of DVD-Audio and SACD discs, when you stop playback of a DVD, CD, or Video CD/Super VCD or D ivX video/WMV discs, RESUME is shown i n the disp lay indicating that you can resume playbac k again from that poi nt. If the di sc tray is not opened, the next time you start playback the display shows RESUME and playback resumes from the resume point. (If you want to clear the resume point, press ï§ STOP w hile RESUME is displayed.) With DVDs and Video C D/Super VCDs, if you take the disc out of the player after stopping playback, th e last play po sition is stored in memory. If the next disc you load is the sam e one, the display shows LAST MEM and playback will resume. For DVD-Video discs, the player stores the play position of the last five discs. When one of these discs is next loaded, you can r esume play back. Note ⢠The Last Memory func tion doesnâÂÂt work with VR format DVD-R/-RW, DVD-Audio or SACD discs. ⢠If you donâÂÂt need the Last Memory function when you stop a disc, you can press ï¨ OPEN/CLOSE to stop playbac k and open the disc tray. Button What it does ï¤ PLAY Star ts playback. If the display shows RESUME or LAST MEM playback starts from the resume or last memor y point (see also Resume and Last Memory below.) ïÂÂ¥ PAUSE P auses a dis c thatâÂÂs playing, or restarts a paused disc. ï§ STOP Stops playback. See also Resume and Last Memory below. ï (remote only) P ress to start fast reverse scanning. P ress ï¤ PLAY to resume normal playback. ï® (remote only) P ress to start fast forward scanning. P ress ï¤ PLAY to resume normal playback. ï¯ PREV Skips to the start of the current track, title or chapter , then to previous tracks/titles/chapters. ï° NEXT Skips to the next track, title or chapter . Numbers (remote only) Use to enter a title/chapter/ track number . P ress ENTER to select. ⢠If the disc is stopped, playback starts from the selected title (for DVD), group (DVD-Audio) or tr ack (for CD/ Vid eo CD /Super VCD ). ⢠If the disc is playing, playback jumps to the start of the selected title (VR mode DVD-RW), chapter (DVD-Video) or track (DVD -Audio*/SACD/ CD/Video CD/Super VCD). *within the current group DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 21 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
04 22 En DVD and DivX disc menus Some DivX medi a files and many DVD-Vi deo and DVD-Audio discs feat ure menus from which you can select what you want to watch. They may also give a ccess to additional features, such as subtit le and audio language selection, or specia l features such as slideshow s. See the di sc packag ing for deta ils. Sometimes DivX and DVD menus are displayed automatically when yo u start playback; others onl y appear when you press MENU or TOP MENU . Important ⢠Some DVD-Audio discs feature a âÂÂbonus groupâÂÂ. To play this g roup you first ha ve to input a password, which you can find on the discâÂÂs packaging. Use the number buttons to input the password. Video CD/Super VCD PBC menus Some Video CD/Super VCDs have menus from which you can choo se what you want to watch. These are called PBC (Playback Co ntrol) menus. You can play a P BC Video CD/Su per VCD without h aving to navigate th e PBC men u by starting playback using a number button to select a t rack, rather than the ï¤ PLAY button. Button What it does TOP MENU Displays the âÂÂtop menuâ of a DVD disc â this varies with the disc. MENU Displays a DVD disc (or Di vX media files) menu â this varies with the disc and may be the same as the âÂÂtop menuâÂÂ. ï©/ïª/ï«/ï¬ Moves the cursor around the screen. ENTER Selects the current menu option. 1 23 CLEAR USB DVD/ 4 5 6 7 89 0 TOP MENU MENU ENTER RETURN HOME MENU RETURN R eturns to the previously displayed menu screen. On some DVD-Audio discs featuring browsable pictures, press to display the browser screen. Numbers (remote only) Highlights a numbered menu option (some discs only). P ress ENTER to select. Button What it does RETURN Displays the PBC menu. Numbers (remote only) Use to enter a numbered m enu option . Pr ess ENTER to select. ï¯ PREV Displays the previous menu page (if there is one). ï° NEXT Displays the next menu page (if there is one). Button What it does 1 23 CLEAR USB DVD/ 4 5 6 7 89 0 TOP MENU MENU ENTER RETURN PLAY PREV PAUSE STOP NEXT HOME MENU DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 22 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
05 23 En Chapter 5 Playing discs Note ⢠Many of the functions cove red in this chapter apply to DVD, SACD, Video CDs/ Super VCDs, CDs, D ivX video/WMV and MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC/JPEG discs, although the exact operation of some varies slightly wi th the kind of disc loaded. ⢠Some DVDs restrict the use of some functions (rando m or repeat, for exam ple) in some or all parts of the disc. This is not a malfunction . ⢠When playing Video CD/Super VCDs, some of the function s are not ava ilable during PBC playback. If you want to use them, start the disc playing using a number button to select a track. Scanning di scs You can fast-scan discs forward or backward at four different speeds (only one speed fo r DivX video/WMV). 1 During pl ayback, press ï or ï® to start scanning. ⢠There is no sound while scanning DVDs, DivX video/WMV and Video CD/ Super VCDs. 2 Press repeatedly to increase the scanning speed. ⢠The scanning speed is shown on-screen. 3 To resume normal playba ck, press ï¤ PLAY. ⢠When scanning a Video C D/Super VCD playing in PBC mode or a MP3/WMA/ MPEG-4 AAC trac k, playback automatically resumes at the en d or beginning of the track. ⢠Depending on the disc, n ormal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is rea ched on a DVD disc. Playing in slow motion You can play DVD-Videos and DVD-R/-RW at four different slow motion speeds, for wards and backwards. Video CD/Super VCDs and DivX video/WMV can be played at four different for ward slow mot ion speeds. 1 During playb ack, press ïÂÂ¥ PAUSE. 2 Press and hold ï±/ or /ï² until slow motion pl ayback starts. ⢠The slow motion speed is shown on-screen. ⢠There is no sound durin g slow motion playback. 3 Press repeatedly to change the slow motion speed. 4 To resume normal playb ack, press ï¤ PLAY. ⢠Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached. DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 23 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
05 24 En Frame advance/fra me reverse You can advance or back up DVD-Video and DVD-R/-RW discs frame-by-frame. With Video CD/Super VCDs and DivX video/W MV file you can only use frame advance. 1 During pl ayback, press ïÂÂ¥ PAUSE. 2P r e s s ï±/ or /ï² to reverse or advance a frame at a time. 3 To resume normal playba ck, press ï¤ PLAY. ⢠Depending on the disc, n ormal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached. Viewing a JPEG sl ideshow When the ï¤ PL AY button is pressed to play JPEG files on DVD, CD, or USB storage device, the slide show will begin from the first fold er or file recorded on the media . The player displays the pictures in each folder in alphabetical order. ⢠If the folder contains MP 3/WMA/ MPEG-4 AAC files, playback of the slideshow and MP3/WMA/MP EG-4 AAC file repeats. Durin g the audio playback, you can still use the skip ( ï¯ PREV/ ï° NEXT ), scan ( ïÂÂ/ï® ) and pause ( ïÂÂ¥ PAUSE ) function s. Pictures are automatically adjusted so th at they fill as much of the screen as possible (if the aspect ratio of the picture is differen t to your TV screen you may n otice black bars at the sides, or at the top and bottom of the screen). While the slideshow is running: Note ⢠T h e t i m e i t t a k e s f o r t h e p l a y e r t o l o a d a f i l e increase s with larg e file sizes . Button What it does ïÂÂ¥ PAUSE P auses the slideshow ; press again to restart. ï¯ PREV Displays the previous picture. ï° NEXT Displays the next picture. ï«/ï¬ P aus es the slideshow and rotates the displayed picture 90ú (counter) clockwise. (P ress ï¤ PLAY to restart slideshow .) ï©/ïª P aus es the slideshow and flips the displayed picture horizontally or vertically . (Press ï¤ PLAY to restart slideshow .) ZOOM P aus es the slideshow and zooms the picture. P ress again to toggle between 1x, 2x and 4x zoom. (P ress ï¤ PLAY to restart slideshow .) MENU Displays the Disc Navigator screen (see page 26). Button What it does DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 24 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
05 25 En Browsing Discs with the Disc Navigator Use the Disc Navi gator to browse through the contents of a DVD-Video, VR mode DVD-R/-RW or Video CD/Super VCD disc to find the part you want to play. Important ⢠You canâÂÂt use the Disc Navigator with Video CD/Super VCDs in PBC mode. 1 During play back, press HOME MEN U and select âÂÂDisc Navigatorâ from the on-screen menu. 2 Selec t a view option. The options av ailable de pend on the kind of disc loaded and wheth er the disc is playing or not, but include: ⢠Title â Titles from a DVD-Video disc. ⢠Chapter â Ch apters from the current t itle of a DVD-Vide o disc. ⢠Track â Tracks from a Video CD/ Super VCD disc. ⢠Time â Thumb nails from a Video CD/ Super VCD disc at 10 minute intervals. ⢠Original: Title â Original titles from a VR mode DVD-R/-RW disc. ⢠Play List: Title â Play List titles from a VR mode DVD-R/-RW disc. ⢠Original: Time â Thumbn ails from the Original content at 10 minute i ntervals. ⢠Play List: Time â Thumb nails from the Play List at 10 minute intervals. The screen shows up to six moving t humbnail images displayed one after another. To display the previous/next six thumbnails, press ï¯ PREV /ï° NEXT (you donâÂÂt have to wait for all th e thumbn ails to fi nish pla ying to display the previous/next page). 3 Select the th umbnail image for what you want to play. You can use either th e cursor buttons ( ï©/ïª/ ï«/ï¬ ) and ENTER to select a thumbnail, or the number buttons. To select using the number butto ns, enter a two-digit number then press ENTER . Tip ⢠Anot her way to fin d a particul ar place on a disc is to use one of the search modes. See Searching a disc on page 30. Disc Navigator Di sc Navigator Title Chapter 0 1 04 02 05 03 0 6 Di sc Navigator: Title 0 1 - 49: - - DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 25 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
05 26 En Browsing Files with the Disc Navigator The Disc Navigator ca n be used to pla y MP3, WMA, MEPG-4 AAC, DivX video, WMV and JPEG files. Use the Disc N avigator to find a particular file or folder by filename. Note that if there a re other types of files on the same disc, these will not be displayed in the Disc Navigator. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂDisc Navigatorâ from th e on-screen menu. 2 Use the cursor buttons ( ï©/ïª/ ï«/ï¬ ) and ENTER to navi gate. Use the cursor u p/down button s ( ï©/ïª ) to move up and down th e folder/file list. Use the cursor left button ( ï« ) to re turn to th e parent folder. Use ENTER or curso r right ( ï¬ ) to open a highlighted folder. ⢠You can also retu rn to the parent folder by going to the top of the list to the â .. â folder, then pressing ENTER . ⢠When a JPEG file is highlighted, a thumbnail image is displayed on the right. 3 To play th e highlighted track or DivX video/WMV fil e or display the highligh ted JPE G file, p ress EN TER. ⢠When a MP3/W MA/MPEG-4 A AC or DivX video/WMV file is selected, playba ck begins, starting with the selected fi le, and continues until the end o f the folder. ⢠When a JPEG file is selected, a sli deshow begins, s tarting wi th that fi le, and continues to th e end of the folder. Tip ⢠You can also play a JPEG slideshow while listening to MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC playback. Simply select the audio file you w a n t t o l i s t e n t o f o l l o w e d b y t h e J P E G f r o m which you want the slideshow to start. Playback of both the slidesh ow and th e audio files repeats. ⢠To play the contents of the whole disc rather than just the cu rr ent fold er, exi t the Disc Navigator and start playback using the ï¤ PLAY button. 00:00 / 00:00 0k bp s Fol der 1 Fol der2 Fol der3 Fol der4 File 1 File2 File3 File4 File5 Fol der 2 00:00 / 00:00 0k bp s DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 26 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
05 27 En Looping a section of a disc The A-B Repeat function allows you to specify two points (A and B) withi n a track (CD, Video CD/Super VCD) or title (DVD-Video and DVD-RW) that form a loop which is played over and over. ⢠You canâÂÂt use A-B Repeat with DVD-Audio, SACD, Video CD/Su per VCDs in PBC mode, or MP3/W MA/MPEG-4 AA C/ DivX video/WMV files. 1 During play back, press PLAY MODE and select â A-B Repe atâ from the list of functions on the left. 2 Press ENTER on âÂÂA(Start Point)â to set the loop start point. 3 Press ENTER on âÂÂB(End Point)â to set the loop end po int. After pressing ENTER , playback jumps back to the start point and plays the loop. 4 To resume norm al pl ayback, select âÂÂOffâ from the menu. Using repeat play There are various repea t play options, depending on th e kind of di sc loaded. ItâÂÂs also possible to use repea t play togeth er with program pl ay to repeat the tracks/c hapters in the program list (see Creating a program list on page 29). Important ⢠You canâÂÂt use Repe at play with Video C D/ Super VCDs in P BC mode, or with MP3/ WMA/MPEG-4 AAC discs. ⢠You canâÂÂt us e repeat and random pl ay at the same time. 1 During playback, press PLAY MODE and select âÂÂRep eatâ from the list of functions on the left. 2 Select a rep eat play option. If program pl ay is active, select Program Repeat to repeat the program l ist, or Rep eat Off to cancel. The repeat options ava ilable depend on the kind of disc loaded. For example , for DVD-Video and DVD-RW discs, you ca n select Titl e Repeat or Chapter Repeat (or Repeat Off ). ⢠For DVD-Audio discs, select Group Repeat or Track Repeat (or Repeat O ff ). ⢠For SACDs, CD s and Video CD/ Super VCDs, select Disc Repeat or Track Repeat (or Repeat Off ). ⢠For DivX video/WMV discs, select Title Repeat , and for so me DivX media files, select Cha pter Repeat (or Repeat Off ). A(Start Point) B(End Point) Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Title Repeat Chapter Repeat Repeat Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Title Repeat Chapter Repeat Repeat Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 27 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
05 28 En Using random play Use the random play func tion to play titles or chapters (DVD-Video), groups (DVD-Audio), or tracks (DVD-Aud io, SACD, CD, Video CD/ Super V CD) at random. ( Note that the sa me track/ti tle/chapter m ay play m ore than o nce.) You can set the random play option when a disc is playing or stopped. Important ⢠Random play re mains in effect un til you select Random Off fr om the ran dom play menu option s. ⢠You canâÂÂt use random play with VR forma t DVD-R/-RW discs, Video CD/S uper VCDs playing in PBC mode, MP3/WMA/ MPEG-4 AAC discs, DivX video/W MV discs, or while a DVD disc menu is being displayed. ⢠You canâÂÂt use ra ndom play together with program or repeat p lay. 1 Press PLAY MODE and s elect âÂÂRandomâ from the list of functions on the left. 2 Selec t a random play option. The random p lay options avail able depend on the kind of disc loaded. For exa mple, for DVD-Video discs, you can select Random T itle or Random Ch apter (or Rand om Off ). ⢠For DVD-Audio discs, select Random Group or Ra ndom Track (or Random Off ). ⢠For SACD, CD s and Video CD/ Super VCDs, select On or Off to switch random p lay on or off . Tip ⢠Use the following c ontrols during random play: Random Title Random Chapter Random Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Random Title Random Chapter Random Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Button What it does ï° NEXT Selects a new track/title/ chapter at random. ï¯ PREV Returns to the beginning of the current track/title/chapter. DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 28 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
05 29 En Creating a program li st This feature lets you prog ram the play order o f titles/ch apters/gro ups/tracks on a disc . Important ⢠You ca nâÂÂt use Progr am play with VR format DVD-R/-RW discs, Video CD/S uper VCDs playing in PBC mode, JPEG, or while a DVD disc menu is being displ ayed. 1 Press PLAY MODE and select âÂÂProgramâ from the list of functions on the left. 2 Select â Create/Editâ from the list of program optio ns. 3 Use the cursor buttons and ENTER to select a title, chap ter or track for the current step in the program list. For a DVD-Video disc, you can add a title or a chapter to the program list. ⢠For a DVD-Audio disc, you can add a whole group, or a track within a group to the program list. ⢠For a SACD , CD or Video CD/S uper VCD, select a track to add to the program list. After pressing ENTER to selec t the titl e/ chapter/group/track, the step number automatically moves down o ne. 4 Repea t step 3 to bu ild up a prog ram list. A program list can c ontain up to 24 titles/ chapters/tracks. ⢠To delet e a step, hi ghlight i t and pres s CLEAR . 5 To play the program list, press ï¤ PLAY. Program play remains ac tive until you turn off program play (see below), erase the pr ogram list (see below), eject the disc or switch off the player. Tip ⢠Use the fol lowing c ontrols durin g program play: Other functions available from the program menu There are a number of other options in the program menu in addition to Create/Edit . ⢠Playback Start â Starts playbac k of a saved program list. ⢠Playback Stop â Tur ns off program play, but does not era se the program list. ⢠Program Delete â Erases the program list and turns off pro gram play. Create/Edit Playback Start Playback Stop Program Delete A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Program Step 01. 01 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Title 1~38 Title 01 Title 02 Title 03 Title 04 Title 05 Title 06 Title 07 Title 08 Chapter 1~004 Chapter 001 Chapter 002 Chapter 003 Chapter 004 Program Button What it does PLAY MODE Save the program list and exit the program edit screen without starting playback ( HOME MENU does the same). ï° NEXT Skip to the next step in the program list. DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 29 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
05 30 En Searchin g a disc You can sear ch DVD-Vide o discs by titl e or chapter number, or by time; DVD-Audio discs can be searched by group or track number; SACDs by track number, CD s and Video CD/ Super VCDs by track nu mber or time; DivX video/WMV discs by time, and some DivX media files by chapter number. Important ⢠Search func tions are not available with Video CD/Super VCDs in PBC mode, or with MP3/WMA/MPEG -4 AAC discs. 1 Press PLAY MODE and select âÂÂSearch Modeâ fro m the list of functions on the left. 2 Selec t a search mode. The search options ava ilable depend on the kind of disc loaded. ⢠The disc must be playing in order to use time search. 3 Use the number bu ttons to enter a title, chapter or track nu mber, or a time. ⢠For a time searc h, enter the num ber of minutes and seconds into the currently playing title (DVD /DivX video/WMV) or track (CD/Video CD/Super VCD ) you want playback to resume from. For example, press 4 , 5 , 0 , 0 to have playback start from 45 minutes into the disc. For 1 ho ur, 20 minutes and 30 seconds, press 8 , 0 , 3 , 0 . ⢠Some DVD-Audio discs feature pages of browsable pictures. Enter the page number you want. 4 Press ENTER to start playback. Note ⢠Time search is not avai lable with DVD R/ RW. Switching subtitles Some DVD-Video and DivX video discs have subtitle s in one o r more lang uages; the disc box will usuall y tell you which subtitle language s are available . You can switch subtitle languag e during p layback. ⢠Press SUBTITLE repeatedly to select a subtitle op tion. Note ⢠Some discs only allow you to change subtitle language from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU or MENU to access. ⢠To set subtitle preferences, see Subtitle Language on page 40. ⢠See Displaying exter nal subtitle files on page 8 for more on DivX subtitles. 0 0 1 Title Search Chapter Search Time Search Input Chapter A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Subtitle English 1/2 Current / T otal DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 30 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
05 31 En Switching audio langua ge/ channels When playing a DVD-Video and DivX video disc recorde d with dialog i n two or more languages, you can switc h audio langu age during pla yback. When playing a VR forma t DVD-R/-RW disc recorded with dual-mono audio, you can switch between the main, su b, and mixed channels during pl ayback. When playing a DVD-Audio disc, you may be able to switch channels â see the di sc box for details. (W hen you change the audio chann el, playback restarts from the beginning of the current track.) When playing a Video C D/Super VCD, yo u can switch between stereo, just t he left channel or just the rig ht channe l. ⢠Press AUD IO repeated ly to select an audio lang uage/channel option . The languag e/channel inf ormation is shown on-screen. Note ⢠Some DVD discs only allow you to change audio language from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU or MENU to access. ⢠To set DVD audio language prefe rences, see Audio Lang uage on page 40. Zooming the s creen Using the zoom feature you can magnify a pa rt of the screen by a facto r of 2 or 4, while watching a DVD, DivX video/WMV title or Video CD/Super VC D or playing a JPEG disc. 1 During playb ack, use the ZOOM button to select th e zoom factor (Norma l, 2x or 4x). ⢠Since DVD, Video CD/Super VCD , DivX video/WMV title an d JPEG pictures have a fixed resolution, picture quality will deteriorate, especially at 4x zoom. This is not a malfunction. 2 Use the cursor butt ons to change the zoomed area. You can change the zoom f actor and the zoomed area freely during playback. ⢠If the navigation squa re at the top of the screen disappears, press ZOOM again to display it. Switching camera angles Some DVD discs feature scenes shot from two or more angles â check the disc box fo r details. When a mu lti-angle scene is playing, a icon appears on scre en to let you know tha t other angles ar e available (this can be switched off if you prefer â see Angle Indicator on page 41). ⢠During playback, press ANGLE to switch angle. Displaying disc informa tion Various track, chap ter and title inf ormation, such as the elapsed and remaining playing time can be disp layed on-s creen while a dis c is playing. ⢠To show/switch/hide the information displayed, press DISPLAY repeate dly. ⢠When a di sc is pla ying, the information appears at the top of the screen. Press DISPLAY repeat edly to chan ge the displayed in formatio n. DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 31 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
06 32 En Chapter 6 USB playback Using the USB interface It is possible to listen to two-channel audio and watch DivX video/WMV/ JPEG files using the USB interface on t he front of this unit. Connect a USB mass storage device as shown below. Note ⢠This includes playback of DivX video/ WMV/MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC/JPEG files (except files with copy-protection or restricted playback). ⢠Compatible USB devices include portab le flash memory (particularly keydrives) and digital audio players ( MP3 players) of format FAT16/32. It is not possible to connect th is unit to a personal co mputer for USB playback. ⢠Pioneer cannot guarant ee compatibility (operation and/or bus power) with all USB mass storage devices and assumes no responsibility for any lo ss of data that may occur when co nnected to this unit. ⢠With large amounts of data, it ma y take longer for the system to read the contents of a USB device. ⢠Some USB devices may not be properly recognized. ⢠Even when th ey are in a su pported format, some files may not play or display depending on the content. 1 With the player switched on, press DVD/USB. Ma k e s u re y ou r T V i s on a n d s e t t o th e co r r ec t video input, and that USB MODE is s howin g on the front panel display. 2 Connect your US B device. The USB termin al is located on the front panel. ⢠Disc Navigator is automatically displayed. 3 Press ENTER to start pl ayback. ⢠T h e m e t h o d o f p l a y b a c k f o r f i l e s s a v e d o n a USB device is the same a s for other discs. For more information, see Basic playback contro ls on page 21 and Playing discs on page 23. 4 Turn off this player and remove the USB device. ⢠The next time you turn this player on i t will start up in USB mode. To return to DV D mode, either press DVD/USB or press ï¨ OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray. Important If a USB ERR message ligh ts in the display, it may mean th at the power require ments of the USB device are too high fo r this player, or that the device is incompatibl e. Try the following: ⢠Switch the player off, then on again. ⢠Reconnecting the USB d e vice with the player switched off. ⢠Change the player back to DVD mode ( LOADING will appear in the front pa nel display whether a disc is inserted or not) by pressing DVD/USB , then o nce again select USB mod e ( USB MODE wi ll appear in the fro nt panel d isplay). ⢠Using a dedicated AC adapter (supplied with the device) for USB power. If this doesnâÂÂt remedy the problem, it is l ikely your USB devic e is incomp atible. ï¨ î OPEN/CLOSE HOME MENU RETURN ENTER TOP MENU MENU USB DVD/USB USB mass sto rage device USB (Type A) DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 32 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
06 33 En Recording the tracks of a music CD on a USB device The track s of a music C D loaded in this u nit can be recorded on a USB co nnected to the USB port. Recording all the tra cks 1 Load the musi c CD. ⢠Press ï§ STOP to stop playback. 2 Press USB REC to display the âÂÂCD -> USB Recâ screen. 3 Press ENTER to start recording. ⢠Recording starts. The screen shown below is displa yed durin g recording . Note ⢠Recording cann ot be started if there is no t enough free space on the USB device.In this case, âÂÂAvailable US B space is lowâ is displayed. Record ing speci fic tracks 1 Load the music CD. ⢠Press ï§ STOP to stop pla yback. 2 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂCD -> USB RecâÂÂ. ⢠CD -> USB R ec can only be select ed when the musi c CD is st opped. 3 Select the track yo u want to record. ⢠Indivi dual â Select one tr ack at a time. ⢠Select All â Select all t he tracks. ⢠All Clear â Clear all se lected tracks . PLAY MODE ZOOM DISPLAY PREV PAUSE STOP NEXT REC USB CD âÂÂ> USB Rec Select T rack Bitrate Start Selected T rack T otal Time T rack 1âÂÂ13 î î Tr a c k 0 1 î î Tr a c k 0 2 î î Tr a c k 0 3 î î Tr a c k 0 4 î î Tr a c k 0 5 î î Tr a c k 0 6 î î Tr a c k 0 7 î î Tr a c k 0 8 î 01:43 î 03:17 î 04:18 î 04:59 î 04:20 î 04:38 î 04:40 î 04:11 î 128kbps î 13 î 055:07 T rack Pr ogress T otal Progress Selected T rack T otal Time î 13 î 055:07 Cancel î 01:43 î 03:17 î 04:18 î 04:59 î 04:20 î 04:38 î 04:40 î 04:11 T rack 1âÂÂ13 î î Tr a c k 0 1 î î Tr a c k 0 2 î î Tr a c k 0 3 î î Tr a c k 0 4 î î Tr a c k 0 5 î î Tr a c k 0 6 î î Tr a c k 0 7 î î Tr a c k 0 8 CD âÂÂ> USB Rec ENTER RETURN HOME MENU CD â > USB Rec Start Selected T rack T otal Time ï¦ï 00 ï¦ï 000:00 Select T rack Bitrate Individual Select All All Clear ï¦ï 01:43 ï¦ï 03:17 ï¦ï 04:18 ï¦ï 04:59 ï¦ï 04:20 ï¦ï 04:38 ï¦ï 04:40 ï¦ï 04:11 T rack 1âÂÂ13 Tr a c k 0 1 Tr a c k 0 2 Tr a c k 0 3 Tr a c k 0 4 Tr a c k 0 5 Tr a c k 0 6 Tr a c k 0 7 Tr a c k 0 8 CD âÂÂ> USB Rec Start Selected T rack T otal Time ï¦ï 01 ï¦ï 003:17 Select T rack Bitrate Individual Select All All Clear ï¦ï 01:43 ï¦ï 03:17 ï¦ï 04:18 ï¦ï 04:59 ï¦ï 04:20 ï¦ï 04:38 ï¦ï 04:40 ï¦ï 04:11 T rack 1âÂÂ13 Tr a c k 0 1 ï§ î Tr a c k 0 2 Tr a c k 0 3 Tr a c k 0 4 Tr a c k 0 5 Tr a c k 0 6 Tr a c k 0 7 Tr a c k 0 8 CD âÂÂ> USB Rec DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 33 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
06 34 En 4 Select the bit rate (transfer rate). â¢S e l e c t 128 kbps , 192 kbps or 320 kbps . 5 Select âÂÂStartâ using the ï©/ïª/ï«/ ï¬ (cursor) buttons, then press ENTER . â¢R e c o r d i n g s t a r t s . Note ⢠When recording is finished, a folder named âÂÂPIONEERâ is created automatically on the USB de vice. The recorded tracks are stored in this f older. ⢠Up to 99 âÂÂPIONEERâ folders can be created. ⢠Recording is not possible if the USB device contains 300 folders or more. Start Selected T rack T otal Time ï¦ï 03 ï¦ï 012:17 Select T rack Bitrate ï§ î 128kbps 192kbps 320kbps ï¦ï 01:43 ï¦ï 03:17 ï¦ï 04:18 ï¦ï 04:59 ï¦ï 04:20 ï¦ï 04:38 ï¦ï 04:40 ï¦ï 04:11 T rack 1âÂÂ13 Tr a c k 0 1 ï§ î Tr a c k 0 2 Tr a c k 0 3 Tr a c k 0 4 ï§ î Tr a c k 0 5 Tr a c k 0 6 ï§ î Tr a c k 0 7 Tr a c k 0 8 CD âÂÂ> USB Rec CD âÂÂ> USB Rec Select T rack Bitrate Start Selected T rack T otal Time T rack 1âÂÂ13 î Tr a c k 0 1 ï§ î Tr a c k 0 2 î Tr a c k 0 3 î Tr a c k 0 4 ï§ î Tr a c k 0 5 î Tr a c k 0 6 ï§ î Tr a c k 0 7 î Tr a c k 0 8 ï¦ï 01:43 ï¦ï 03:17 ï¦ï 04:18 ï¦ï 04:59 ï¦ï 04:20 ï¦ï 04:38 ï¦ï 04:40 ï¦ï 04:11 ï¦ï 128kbps ï¦ï 03 ï¦ï 012:17 T rack Pr ogress T otal Progress Selected T rack T otal Time ï¦ï 03 ï¦ï 012:17 Cancel ï¦ï 01:43 ï¦ï 03:17 ï¦ï 04:18 ï¦ï 04:59 ï¦ï 04:20 ï¦ï 04:38 ï¦ï 04:40 ï¦ï 04:11 T rack 1âÂÂ13 î Tr a c k 0 1 ï§ î Tr a c k 0 2 î Tr a c k 0 3 î Tr a c k 0 4 ï§ î Tr a c k 0 5 î Tr a c k 0 6 ï§ î Tr a c k 0 7 î Tr a c k 0 8 CD âÂÂ> USB Rec DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 34 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
07 35 En Chapter 7 Audio Settings and Video Adjust menus Audio Settings menu The Audio Se ttings menu offers features for adjusting the way discs sound. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂAudio Settingsâ from the on-scre en display. 2 Select and change settings using the ï©/ ïª/ï«/ï¬ (cursor) buttons, and EN TER. Virtual Surround â¢S e t t i n g s : On , Off (default) Switch on Vi rtual Sur round to enjoy realistic surround sound effects from just two speakers. Note ⢠96 kHz linear PCM audio is automatica lly downsampled to 48 kHz if Virtual Surround is switched on. ⢠If the pl ayer is output ting Dolb y Digital, DTS or MPEG bitstream audio (in other words, no conversion to PCM), Virtual Surround ha s no effect on the audio from the digital output. See Digital Audio Out settings on page 38 for how to set up the digital output formats. ⢠How good the surround effect is varies with the disc. Audio DRC ⢠Settings: High , Medium , Low , Off (defaul t) When watching Dolby Digital D VDs at low volume, itâÂÂs easy to lose the quie ter sounds comple tely â inc luding some of the di alog. Switchin g Audio DR C (Dynamic Ra nge Control) t o on can he lp by bring ing up th e quieter sounds, while co ntrolling loud peaks. How much of a difference you hea r depends on the material youâÂÂre listening to . If the material doesnâÂÂt have wide variations in volume, you may not notice much chan ge. Note ⢠Audio DRC is only effective with D olby Digital audio sources. ⢠Audio DRC is only effective throu gh the digital output when Digital Out is set to On , and Dolby Digital Out is set to Dolby Digital > PCM (see Digital Audi o Out settings on page 38). ⢠The effect of Audio DRC also depends on your speakers and A V receiver settings. Dialog ⢠Settings: High , Medium , Low , Off (defaul t) The Dialog feature is designed to make the dialog stand out from other background sounds in the soundtracks. Video Adjust menu From the Video Adjust screen you can adjust various settings that affect how the pict ure is presented. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂVideo Adjustâ from the on -screen display. Audio Settings Audio Settings Virtual Surround Audio DRC Dialog On Off Video Adjust DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 35 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
07 36 En 2 Make settings using the ï©/ïª/ï«/ï¬ (cursor) buttons, an d ENTER. You can ad just the f ollowing picture qu ality settings: ⢠Sharpness â Adjusts the sharpness of edges in the picture ( Fine , Standard (default) , Soft ). ⢠Brightness â Adjusts the overall brightness ( âÂÂ20 to 20 ). ⢠Contrast â Adjusts the contrast between light and dark ( âÂÂ16 to 16 ). ⢠Gamma â Adjusts the âÂÂgr adationâ of the picture ( âÂÂ3 to 3 ). ⢠Hue â Adjusts the red/green balance ( green 9 to red 9 ). ⢠Chroma Level â Adjusts how saturated colors appea r ( âÂÂ9 to 9 ). ⢠BNR â S witches on/off block noise reduction ( On , Off (default) ). Adjust the Brightness , Contrast , Hue , Gamma and Chroma Leve l se ttings using the ï«/ï¬ (cursor lef t/right) bu ttons. 3 Press ENTER to re turn to the Video Adjust screen, or HOME MENU to exit. Sharpness Brightness Contrast Gamma Hue Chroma Level BNR Standard 0 0 0 0 0 Off ï¤ ï¤ ï¤ ï¤ ï¤ ï¤ ï¤ Video Adjust Brightness min max 0 DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 36 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
08 37 En Chapter 8 Initial Settings menu Using the Initial Setti ngs menu The Initial Settings menu p rovides audio and video output settings, parental lock settings, and display settings, among others. If an option is gray ed out it means that it cannot be changed at the current time. This is usually bec ause a disc is playing . Stop the disc, then change the settin g. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂInitial SettingsâÂÂ. 2 Use the cursor buttons and ENTER to select the setting and option you wan t to set. All the settings and options are explained on the following pages. Note ⢠In the table below, the default sett ing is shown in bold ; other settings are shown in italics . â¢T h e Digital Audio Out settings only need to be set if you have connected the digital output of this player to an A V receiver, or other equipment. ⢠Check the operati ng instructions supplied with your other equipment to see which digital aud io formats itâÂÂs compat ible with. ⢠Some settings, such as TV Screen , Audio Langua ge and Subtitle Language may be overridden by the DVD disc. Often these settings can also be made from the DVD disc menu. â¢T h e HDMI Out , HDMI Resolution and HDMI Color settings only need to be set if you connected this player to an HDMI-compatible compon ent using the HDMI connector. â¢T h e Digital Audio Out , Compone nt Out , AV Connector Out and Speakers settings cannot be set if the player is con nected t o an HDMI-compa tible compone nt using the HDMI connector. Additionally, certa in settings such as HDMI Out , HDMI Resolution , and HDMI Color may be changed automatically. Initial Settings DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 37 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
08 38 En Digital Audio Out settings Setting Option What it means HDMI Out LPCM ( 2CH) Set if your monitor or device only accepts stereo input. On this setting mul tichannel audio is downmixed to 2 channels for stereo linear PCM output. LPCM ( 5.1CH) Set if the monitor or device you hav e connected using HDMI is compatible with Linear PCM mu lti- channel formats. All audi o signals are output as linear PCM 5.1 format. (Use this setting if you want to decode all streams by a player .) Auto Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG sources are processed according to how they were encoded, and linear PCM sources are heard as is. Auto (DSD) Set if you want to output DSD audio from an SACD source. Off No digital audio output. Ch oose this option when you want to change the Digital Audio Out and Speakers settings. Digital Out On Digital audio is output from the digital outputs. Off No digital audio output. Dolby Digital Out Dolby Digital Dolby D igital encoded digital audio i s output when playing a Dolby Digital DVD di sc. Dolby Digital > PCM Dolby Digital audio is converted to PCM audio before being output. DTS Out DTS DTS encoded digital audio is output when playing a DTS disc. (Noise will be output if your amplifier/ receiver is not compatible with D TS audio.) DTS > PCM No digital audio is output when playing a DTS disc.DTS audio is converted to PCM audio before being output. Linear PCM Out D own Sample On 96 kHz digital audio is converted to 48 kHz for digital output. Note that Hig h sampling rate DVD- Audio discs (192 kHz or 176.4 kHz) automatically output down-sampled audio through the digital outputs. Down Sample Off 96 kHz digital audio is output as is at 96 kHz. MPEG Out MPEG MPEG encoded digital audio is output as is. MPEG > PCM MPEG enc oded digital audio is converted to PCM audio for digital output. DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 38 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
08 39 En Video Output settings Setting Option What it means TV Screen (This setting effective for analog and HDMI video output. See also Screen sizes and disc formats on page 51.) 4:3 (Letter Box) Set if you have a conventional 4:3 TV . W i descreen movies are shown with black bars top and bottom. 4:3 ( Pan & Scan) Set if you have a conventional 4:3 TV . Wides c reen movies are shown with the sides cropped so that the image fills the screen. 16:9 ( Wide) Set if you have a widescreen TV . 16:9 (Compr essed) Can be selected when you are connected via HDMI, and have the HDMI Resolution set to 1920x1080p , 1920x1080i or 1280x720p . Video in 4:3 can be properly displayed on a 16:9 high definition television (w ith black bars shown on either side of the screen). Component Out Progressive Set if your TV is compatible with progressive scan video (see your TVâÂÂs instruction manu al for details). The PRGS VE indicator lights in the front panel display . See also Switching the video output to interlace using the front panel controls on page 12. Note that progressive scan video is only output from the component video jacks. Interlace Set if your TV is not compatible with progressive scan video. HDMI Resolution 1920x1 080p Set if your TV supports 1920 x1080 pixel progressiv e-scan v ideo (24 Hz frame rate is not supported). 1920x1 080i Set if your TV supports 1920x1080 pix el interlace video. 1280x7 20p Set if your TV supports 1280x720 pixel progressive-scan video. 720x480p (NTSC)/ 720x576p (PAL) Set if your TV supports 720x480 pixel (NTSC)/ 720x576 pixel (PAL) progressive -scan video. 720x480i (NTSC)/ 720x576i (PAL) Set if your TV supports 720x480 pixel (NTSC)/ 720x576 pixel (PAL) interlace video . HDMI Color Full range RGB If colors are weak, this gives brighter colors and deeper black. RGB Use this setting if colors appear overly rich on th e Full range RGB setting. Compon ent Outputs component video format (default setting for HDMI-compatible devices). DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 39 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
08 40 En Language settings Setting Option What it means Audio Langu age English (for Taiwanes e model, Chinese) If there is an English (for T aiwanese model, Chinese) soundtrack on the disc then it will be played. Languages as displayed If there is the language selected on the disc, then it will be played. Other Language Select to choose a language other than the ones displayed (page 53). Subtitle Language (See also Displaying external subtitle files on page 8.) English (f or Taiwanes e model, Chinese) If there are English (for T aiwanese model, Chinese) subtitles on the disc then they will be displayed. Languages as displayed If there i s the subtitle lan guage selected on th e disc, then it will be displayed. Other Language Select to choose a language other than the ones displayed (page 53). DVD Menu Lang. w /Subtitle Lang. DVD disc menus will be displayed in the same language as your selected subtitle lang uage, if possible. Languages as displayed DVD disc menus will be di splayed in the selected language, if possible. Other Language Select to choose a language other than the ones displayed (page 53). Subtitle Display On Subtitles are displayed according to your selected subtitle language (see above). Off Subtitles are always off by default when you play a DVD disc (note that some discs override this setting). DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 40 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
08 41 En Display settings Options settings Parental Lock ⢠Default level: Off ; Default password: none ; Default Country/Area code: us (2119) To give you some control o ver what your children watch on your D VD player, some DVD-Video discs feature a Parental Lock level. If your player is set to a lower level than th e disc, the disc wonâÂÂt play. Some discs also supp ort the Country/Area Code feature. The player does not play certain scenes on these discs, depending on the Country/Area Code you set. Setting Option What it means OSD Languag e English (for Tai wanese mod el, Chinese) On-screen displays of the pl ayer are in English (for T aiwanese model, Chinese). Languages as displayed On-screen displays are shown in the language selected. Angle Indicato r On A camera icon is displayed on-screen during multi-angle scenes on a DVD disc. Off No multi-angle indication i s shown. Setting Option What it means Parental Lock â See Parental Lock below. DVD Playback Mo de DVD-Audio All material on a DV D-Audio disc is playable. DVD-Video Only the DVD- Video part of a DVD-Audio disc is playable. SACD Playback 2ch Area Selects the 2 channel (strereo) SACD audio area of the disc for playback. Multi-c h Area Selects the multi-channel SACD audio area of the disc for playback. CD Area Selects the standard CD audio area of an SACD/ CD hybrid disc for playback. DTS Downmix STEREO Downmixes DTS for 2 channel output to regular stereo. (Se e also DTS Downmix on page 43.) Lt/Rt Downmixes DTS for 2 channel output to be compatible with Dolby Surround matrix decoders. (See also DTS Downmix on page 43.) DivX VOD Display See About DivXî VOD content on page 43. DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 41 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
08 42 En Note ⢠Not all discs use Parental Lock, an d will play without requiring the password first. ⢠If you forget your password, you âÂÂll need to reset the player to register a new password (see Resetting the player on page 53). Registering a new password You must register a password before you can change the Parental Lock level or enter a Country code. 1 Select âÂÂO ptionsâÂÂ, then âÂÂPassw ordâÂÂ. 2U s e t h e n u m b e r b u ttons to enter a 4-digit p assword. The numbe rs you enter show up as asterisks (*) on-screen. 3 Press ENTER to register the password. You will return to the Options menu screen. Changing your password To change your password, confirm your existing password then enter a new one. 1 Selec t âÂÂPassword Changeâ . 2 Use the number butto ns to enter your existing passwo rd, then press ENTER. 3 Enter a new password an d press ENTER . This registers the new password and you will return to the Options men u screen. Setting/changing the Parental Lock 1 Select â Level ChangeâÂÂ. 2 Use numb er buttons to enter your password, then press ENTER. 3 Select a new level an d press ENTER. ⢠Press ï« (cursor le ft) repea tedly to lo ck more levels (more discs will require the password); press ï¬ (cur sor right) to unlock levels. You canâÂÂt lo ck level 1. This sets the new level and you will return to the Options menu screen. Setting/changing the Country/Area code You can find the Country/Area code list on page 60. 1 Select âÂÂCou ntry CodeâÂÂ. 2 Use numb er buttons to enter your password, then press ENTER. 3 Select a Country/Are a code and press ENTER. There are two ways you can do this: ⢠Select by code letter: Use ï©/ïª (cursor up/ down) to c hange th e Country/Are a code. ⢠Select by code number: Press ï¬ (cursor right) then use th e number buttons to enter the 4-digit Country/Area code. The new Country/Area code is set and you will return to the Optio ns menu screen. Note that the new Countr y/Area code doesnâÂÂt tak e effect until the next disc is load ed (or the current disc is reloaded). Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers Parental Loc k DVD Pla yback Mode SACD Pla yback DTS Downmix DivX V OD Pas swo rd Level Change Country Code Initial Settings DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 42 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
08 43 En DTS Downmix ⢠Default setti ng: STEREO If youâÂÂve selected DTS > PCM in DTS Out on page 38 or 2 Channel in Audio Output Mo de on page 44, you can choose the way the signa l is downmixed to PCM audio. STEREO will downmix the DTS signal to 2-chann el stereo, whereas Lt/Rt will downmix to a 2-channel signal compatib le with Dolby surround matrix decoders. (This allows yo u to hear surroun d sound if your AV receiver or amplifier ha s Dolby Pro Logic capability.) About DivX î VOD content In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand) content on this player, you first need to register the player with the DivX VO D registration system. You do this by generating a DivX VOD registration code from the device, wh ich you will submit to DivX via the DivX Player program available for your computer. Important ⢠DivX VOD content is protected by a DRM (Digital Right s Management ) system. This restricts playback of content to specific, registered devices. ⢠If you load a disc that c ontains Di vX VOD content not authorized for your play er, the message Authorization Error is displayed and the c ontent wil l not play. ⢠Resetting the player (as described in Resetting the player on page 53) will not cause you to lose your registration code. Displaying your DivX VOD registration code 1 Press HOM E MENU and sel ect âÂÂInitial SettingsâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂOptio nsâÂÂ, then âÂÂDivX VODâ . 3 Select âÂÂDi splayâÂÂ. Your 8-digit registration code i s displayed. ⢠Make a note o f the code as you will need it to complete your registratio n. Playing DivX î VOD content Some DivX VOD con tent may only be play able a fixed number of times. When you load a disc containing this type of DivX VOD content, th e remaining num ber of plays is show n on-screen and you then have the option of playing the disc (thereby using up one of t he remaining plays), or stopping. If you load a disc that contains expired DivX VOD content (for example, content that has zero re maining plays), the message Rental Expired is displayed. If your DivX VOD content allo ws an unlimited number of plays, then yo u may load the disc into your player and play the content as often as you lik e, and no m essage will be displayed. Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers STEREO Lt/Rt Initial Settings Parental Loc k DVD Pla yback Mode SACD Pla yback DTS Downmix DivX V OD Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers Parental Loc k DVD Pla yback Mode SACD Pla yback DTS Downmix DivX V OD Display Initial Settings Initial Settings DivX (R) Video On Demand 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Y our registration code is: T o learn more visit www .divx.com/vod Done Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 43 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
08 44 En Speakers se ttings Audio Output Mode ⢠Default setti ng: 2 Channel If you connected this player to you r amplifier using the 5.1 chan nel analog outputs (fro nt, surround, center and subwoofer outs), set this to 5.1 Channel ; if you connected only the stereo outs, set to 2 Channel . Note ⢠Even if you set Audio Outp ut Mode to 5.1 Channel , youâÂÂll only g et sound from all speakers when playing a 5.1 ch annel multi-channel disc. ⢠When set to 5.1 Channe l , only the front left/ right chan nels are outp ut from t he AUDIO OUT (2ch) jacks. Chan ge to 2 Channel if you want to listen to downmixed stereo audio (for example, because y ou are listening through the TVâÂÂs built- in speakers). ⢠When set to 5.1 Channel there is no digital output when playing DVD-Audio. â¢I f y o u s e t t o 2 Channel , Dolby Di gital, DTS and MPEG audio is mixed down to two channels s o you still hea r all the aud io recorded on the disc. W ith DTS encoded audio, you can choose ho w the signal is downmixed to PCM audio. See DTS Downm ix on page 43 to change the downmix setting. ⢠Some DVD-Audio discs donâÂÂt allow down- mixing of audio. These discs always output multi-channel au dio regardless of the setting made here. Setting Option What it means Audio Output Mode 2 Channel The player outputs analog audio in stereo only . See also Audio Output Mode below. 5.1 Channel The player outputs 5.1 channel analog audio . See also Audio Output Mode below. Speaker Distance â Specify the distance of your speakers from your listening position. See also Speaker Distance on page 48. Speaker Installation â Specify the number and size of speakers in your system. See also Speaker Installati on on page 49. Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers Audio Output Mode Speaker Distance Speaker Installation 2 Channel 5.1 Channel Initial Settings DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 44 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
08 45 En About the audio output settings The table b elow sho ws how t he audio s ettings y ou make in t he Initial S etting s menu (see page 37) affect the outpu t from the 2 channel an d the 5.1 channel a nalog outputs, and from the digital outputs with va rious types of disc. Disc audio format Player setting Front L/ R analog outputs 1 1. When Audio Output Mode is set to 2C h a n n e l , the AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) FRONT L/R jacks act as a second pair of stereo audio outputs. Surround L/R, Ce nter, SW, outputs 1 Digital outputs PCM convert 2 2. Dolby Digital > PCM , MPEG > P CM or DTS > PCM setting (page 38) Bitstream 3 3. Dolby Digital , MPEG or DTS setting (page 38) DVD Dolby Digital 2ch 5.1ch 2ch downmix Fr o n t L / R â Surround L/R , Center , SW 2ch downmix Dolby Digita l Dolby Digital karaoke 2ch/5. 1ch Left/Right â Left/Right Dolby Digita l Linear PCM 2ch/5. 1ch Left/Right â Left/Right Lef t/Right DTS 2ch 5.1ch 2ch downmix Fr o n t L / R â Surround L/R , Center , SW 2ch downmix DTS MPEG 2ch 5.1ch Left/Right Fr o n t L / R â Surround L/R , Center , SW Left/Right MPEG DVD-Audio 2c h 5.1ch 2ch downmix 4 Fr o n t L / R 4. Discs that prohibit downmixing will be output as 5 .1 channel even if 2 Channel is sele cted as the Audio Ou tput Mode setting (page 44). â Surround L/R , Center , SW 2ch downmix 5 â 5. Discs that prohibit downmixing also mute the digital output. 2ch downmix 5 â DVD-RW (VR mode) 2ch/5. 1ch Left/Right 6 6. When Audio Output Mode is set to 5.1 Channel , mono sources are hea rd fr om the center speaker only. â Left/Right Dolby Digita l MPEG or PCM Super Audio CD 2ch 5.1ch 2ch downmix Fr o n t L / R â Surround L/R , Center , SW â â CD 2ch/5. 1ch Left/Right â Left/Right Lef t/Right DTS CD 2ch 5.1ch 2ch downmix Fr o n t L / R â Surround L/R , Center , SW 2ch downmix DTS Video CD 2ch/5. 1ch Left/Right â Left/Right Lef t/Right DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 45 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
08 46 En About the HDMI audio outp ut settings The table below shows how the audio set tings you make in the HDMI Out (see HDMI Out on page 38) and Audio Outp ut Mode screens ( Audio Output Mode on page 44) affect the HDMI output with various types of disc. Disc audio format HDMI Out setting LPCM (2CH) LPCM (5.1CH) Auto Auto (DSD) DVD Linear PCM 1 1. T hese formats include DVD-RW discs. Left/Right Left/Right Left/Right Left/Right MPEG 1 Left/Right 5.1ch 2 2. If the HDMI device you are using is not compatible with Multi-ch formats, the output signal is the same as LPCM (2CH) settin g. MPEG 3 3. If the HDMI device you are using is not compatible with these compressed formats, the signal is output as linear PCM. MPEG 3 Dolby Digital (karaoke) Left/Right 5.1ch 2 Dolby Digital 3 Dolby Digital 3 Dolby Digital 1 2ch downmix 5.1ch 2 Dolby Digital 3 Dolby Digital 3 DTS 2ch downmix 5.1ch 2 DTS 3 DTS 3 DVD-Audio (with CPPM) 4 4. I f the connected component is not DVD-Audio (CPPM) compatible, it is not possible to outp ut CPPM copy- controlled DVD-Audio sources from the HDMI connection (see HDMI output with DVD- Audio and SACD sources below for more on this). Left/Right or 2ch downmix 5 5. If the d iscs prohibit downmixing, output AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) FRONT L/R . 5.1ch 2 5.1ch 2 5.1ch 2 DVD-Audio (without C PPM) Left/Right or 2ch downmix 5 5.1ch 2 5.1ch 2 5.1ch 2 CD CD/MP3/WMA/ MPEG-4 AAC Left/Right Left/Right Left/Right Left/Right Video CD Left/Right Lef t/Right Left/Right Left/Right DTS CD Left/Right 5.1ch 2 DTS 3 DTS 3 Super Audio CD 6 6. If the connected HDMI device is not compatible wi th protected audio contents (su ch as DVD-Audio or SACD), SACD audio is not output from the HDMI terminal. Left/Right 5.1ch 2 5.1ch 2 5.1ch (DSD) 2,7 7. An alog SACD audio is not output when you have HDMI Out set to Auto (DSD) . DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 46 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
08 47 En HDMI output with DVD-Audio and SACD sources The way audio sources are output from the HDMI terminal depends on the specification of the connect ed component. Components specifica tion Example compo nent Disc format (DVD-Audi o or SACD) SACD 2ch 5.1ch Auto (DSD) Component /output SACD, DVD-Audio and 5.1 chan nel compatible on HDMI 1 1. This unit checks the specification of the connected component (such sample rate/multic hannel limitations and compatibility with protected audio contents) and outputs th e signal accordingly. Note that âÂÂDVD-Audio compatibleâ indicates compatibil ity with protected audio contents. âÂÂS AC D compatibleâ indicates c omp atibility with DSD si gnals. VSX-LX70 2ch 5.1ch 2 2. If HDMI Out setting (page 38) is s et to LPCM (2CH), DVD-Audio multichannel sources will be downmixed to stereo. (In cases where the source is downmix-prohibited, only the front left/right channels are output.) For SACD sources, the 2 channel (stereo) SACD audio area is selected. If the video output resolution is 480i, 576i, 480p or 576p, audio output ma y be limited to 2 channel (depending to the connected component). DSD 2ch / 5.1 ch DVD-Audio and 5.1 channel compati ble on HDMI 1 VSX-AX4A Vi-G 2ch 5.1ch 2 No sound DVD-Audio and 2c h a n n e l compatible on HDMI 1 PDP -508XDA/ PDP -508 XG PDP -428XDA/ PDP -428 XG 2ch Left/Right or 2ch downmix 3 3. In cases where the source is downmix-prohibited , only the front left/right channels are output. No sound Incompatible w ith DVD-Audio on HDMI 1 PDP -505HDC PDP -435HDC No sound 4 4. If CPPM shows in the front panel display, it means it is not possible to ou tput CPPM copycontrolled DVD-Audi o sources from the HDMI connect ion. Discs with no CPPM protection are limited to 2 channel output. No sound 4 No sound DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 47 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
08 48 En Speake r Distance ⢠Default setti ngs: all speakers 3.0m You only need to make this setting if y ou connected this player to your amp lifier using the 5.1 channel analog outp uts. These settings do not affect any digital audio output. To get the best surround so und from your system, you should set up the speake r distances from your listeni ng position. 1U s e t h e ï©/ïª (cursor up/down) to select a speaker. â¢T h e L and R speakers are paired; you canâÂÂt set them differently. 2P r e s s ï¬ (cursor right) to change the speaker di stance for the highligh ted speaker. 3U s e t h e ï©/ïª (curso r up/dow n) to change the distance. ⢠When you change the distance settings of the front left ( L ) or front right (R ) speakers, all the other speaker distances c hange relative to it. ⢠Front left/right ( L /R ) speaker distances can be set from 30 cm to 9 m in 30 cm in cre- ments. ⢠The center speaker ( C ) can be set from â 2.1 m to 0.0 m relative to the front left/right speakers. ⢠Surround left/right ( SL / SR ) speakers can be set from âÂÂ6.0 m to 0. 0 m relative to th e front left/rig ht speakers. ⢠You canâÂÂt set the subwoofer ( SW ) distance. 4 Press ï« (cursor left) to go back to the speaker list if you want to modify another speaker, or press ENTER to exit the Speaker Distance screen. Note During playback of SACD and M PEG-audio DVD-Video discs, the effective C , SL and SR speaker distance settings are âÂÂ0.9 m to 0.0 m relative to the front le ft/right speakers. Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers Audio Output Mode ï¤ 5.1 Channel Speaker Distance Speaker Installation Initial Settings Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers L C R SR SL 3.0m 3.0m 3.0m 3.0m 3.0m Initial Settings DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 48 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
08 49 En Speaker Inst allation â¢D e f a u l t s e t t i n g s : L/R: Large | C: Large | SL/ SR: Large | SW: On You only need to make this setting if y ou connected this player to your amp lifier using the 5.1 channel analog outp uts. This setting does not affect digital audio output. Use the Speaker Installation screen to tell the player what kinds of speakers you have connected. 1U s e t h e ï©/ïª (curso r up/down) buttons to select a speaker. â¢T h e L and R , and SR and SL speakers are paired; you canâÂÂt set them differently. 2P r e s s ï¬ (cursor right) to modify the selected spe aker. 3U s e t h e ï©/ïª (curso r up/down) buttons to change the current setting. ⢠You can see the effect of yo ur changes in the room graphic on the right of the screen. ⢠Except for the subwoofer, you can set speaker size to Large or Small . If the main speaker cone in the speaker is 1 2 cm or more, set to Large , otherwise set to Small (or Off if you donâÂÂt have th at speaker). ⢠If you set the front L and R speakers to Small , the center and su rround speakers are automa tically set to Smal l and the subwoofer to On . ⢠The subwoofer can only be set to On or Off . 4P r e s s ï« (cursor left) to go back to the speaker list if you want to modify another speaker, or press ENTER to exit the Speaker Installation screen. Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers Audio Output Mode ï¤ 5.1 Channel Speaker Distance Speaker Installation Initial Settings Digital Audio Out Video Output Language Display Options Speakers L C R SR SL SW Large Large Large Large Large On Initial Settings DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 49 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
09 50 En Chapter 9 Additional information Taking care of your player and discs General Hold discs by the edge or by the center hole and edge. When youâÂÂre not using a disc, retu rn it to its case and store upright. Avoid leaving di scs in excessively cold, humid, or ho t environmen ts (including under direct sunlight). DonâÂÂt glue paper or put stickers on to discs. Do not use a pencil, ba ll-point pen o r other sharp-tipped writing inst rument to write on the disc. DonâÂÂt use self-adhesive disc labels on d iscs as these can cause the disc to wa rp slightly during playbac k causing d istor tion in the picture and/or sound. Damaged and shaped discs Do not use cracked, chip ped, warped, or otherwise damaged discs as they may damage the player. This player is designed to be used only with conventional, fully circu lar discs. Do not use shaped discs. Pioneer disclaims al l liability arising in connectio n with the use of shaped discs. Cleaning discs Fingerprints and dust on di scs can affect playback performance. Clean using a soft, dry cloth, wiping the disc li ghtly from the center to the outside edge as shown below. If necessar y, use a cloth soa ked in alcohol, or a commerci ally available CD/DVD cleaning kit to clean a disc more thorou ghly. Never use benzine, thinn er or other cleaning agents, including products designed fo r cleaning vinyl record s. Cleaning the unitâÂÂs exterior Unplug the unit before cleaning. Use a dry cloth to wipe off dust and di rt. If the surfaces are very dirty, wipe with a soft cloth dipped in some neutral cleanser diluted five or six times with water and wrung out well, then wipe again with a dry c loth. Do not use furniture wax or cleaners. Never use thin ners, benzine o r insectic ide sprays or other chemica ls on or near this uni t. If you use a ch emical-i mpregnated cleaning cloth, r ead the instruct ions carefully befo re use. These cloths may leave smea r marks on half-mirror finish surfaces; if this happens, finish with a dry clot h. DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 50 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
09 51 En Cleaning the pickup lens The DVD playerâÂÂs lens should not becom e dirty in normal use, but if for some reason it should malfunction due to dust o r dirt, consult your nearest Pioneer-a uthorized service center. W e do not recommend using commercially available le ns cleane rs fo r CD players. Condensation Condensation may form inside the player if it is brought into a wa rm room from outside, o r if the temperature of the room rises quickly. Although the condensatio n wonâÂÂt damage th e player, it may temporarily impair its performance. Leave it to adjust to the warmer temperature fo r about an hour be fore switching on. Moving the player If you need to move this unit, first re move the disc, if there's one loaded, and close the disc tray. Next, press ïµ STA NDBY/ON to switch the power to sta ndby, checking that th e -OFF- indication in the display goes off. Last ly, disconnect the power cord. Never lift or move the unit dur ing playback â discs rotate at a high speed and may be damaged. Caution for when the unit is installed in a rack with a glass door Do not press the ï¨ OPEN/CLOSE button on the rem ote control to op en the disc table while the glass door is closed. The do or will hamper movement of the disc table, and the disc table could be damaged. Screen sizes and disc formats DVD-Video discs come in several different screen aspect ratio s, ranging from TV programs, which are generally 4: 3, to CinemaScope widescree n movies, with an aspect ratio of up to about 7:3. Televisions, too, come in different a spect ratios; âÂÂstandardâ 4:3 and widescreen 16:9. Widescreen TV users If you have a widescreen TV, the TV Screen setting (page 39) of this player should be set to 16:9 (Wide) or 16:9 (Compressed) . When you watch discs recorded in 4:3 forma t with the 16:9 (Wide) setting, you can use the TV controls to select how th e picture is presented. Your TV may offer various zoom and stretch options; see the instructions that came with you r TV for details . Please note that some movie a spect ratios are wider than 16:9, so even though yo u have a widescreen TV, these discs will still play in a âÂÂletter boxâ style with black bars at the top and bottom of the screen. DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 51 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
09 52 En Standard TV users If you have a stan dard TV, the TV Screen setting (page 39) of this player shou ld be set to 4:3 (Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan & Scan) , depending on which you prefer. Set to 4:3 (Letter Box) , widescreen discs are shown with black bars top and bottom. Set to 4:3 (Pan & Scan) , widescreen discs are shown with the left and right sides cropped. Although the picture looks larger, you don âÂÂt actually see the whole picture. Please note that many widescreen discs override the playerâÂÂs settings so tha t the disc is shown in let ter box forma t regardles s of the setting. Note â¢U s i n g t h e 16:9 (Wide) or 16: 9 (Compressed) setting with a standard 4:3 TV, or either of the 4:3 settin gs with a widescreen TV, will result in a distorted picture. Setting the TV system ( Except Taiwanese mo del ) The defa ult settin g of this pl ayer is AUTO , and unless y ou notice that t he picture i s distorted when playing some discs, you should leave it set to AUTO . If yo u experience picture distortion with some discs, set the TV system to match your co untry or regionâÂÂs system . Doing this, however, m ay restrict the kinds of disc you can watch. The table below shows what kinds o f disc are compatible with each setting ( AUTO , NTSC and PAL ). 1 If the player is on, press ïµ STANDBY / ON to swi tch it to stan dby. 2 Using the front panel controls, hold down ï° then press ïµ STAND BY/ON to switch the TV system. The TV system changes as follows: ⢠AUTO ï¤ NTSC ⢠NTSC ï¤ PAL ⢠PAL ï¤ AUTO Note ⢠You have to switch the player in to standby (press ïµ STANDBY/ON ) before each change. Disc Type Player setting Form at NTSC PAL AU TO DVD/ Super VCD/ Video CD/ DivX video/ WMV NTSC NTSC PAL NTSC PAL NTSC PAL PAL CD/MP3/ WMA/ MPEG-4 AAC /JPEG no disc â NTSC PAL NTSC or PAL DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 52 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
09 53 En Resetting the player Use this procedu re to reset all the playerâÂÂs settings to the factory defa ult. 1 Switch the player in to standby. 2 Using the front panel buttons, hold down the ï§ (sto p) button and pre ss ïµ STANDBY/ON to switch the playe r back on. All the playerâÂÂs settings a re now reset. DVD-Video regions All DVD-Video discs car ry a region mark on the case somewhere that indicates which region(s) of the world the di sc is compatible with. Your DVD player also has a region mark, which you can fin d on the rear pan el. Discs from inco mpatible regions wil l not p lay in this player. In this case the attention senten ce Incompatible disc regi on number CanâÂÂt play disc is displayed on screen. Discs marked ALL will pla y in any play er. The diagram below shows the various DVD regions of the world. Selecting languages using the language code list Some of th e language options (such as âÂÂDVD Menu Lang .â in the Init ial Settings ) allow you to set your preferred lan guage from any of the 136 languages listed in the language co de list on page 60. 1 Select âÂÂOther Lang uageâÂÂ. 2U s e t h e ï«/ï¬ (cursor left/right) buttons to select either a code letter or a code numbe r. 3U s e t h e ï©/ïª (cursor up/d own) buttons to select a code letter or a code number. See Language code list on page 60 for a complete list of languages and cod es. 1 2 2 5 5 6 3 2 1 4 4 DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 53 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
09 54 En Troubleshooting Incorrect operatio n is often mistaken for tro ubl e or malfu nction. If you think th at there is something wrong with this comp onent, check the points below. Sometimes the trou ble may lie in another co mponent. Inspect th e other componen ts and electrical appl iance s being used. If the trouble cannot be recti fied after checking the items below, ask your nearest P ioneer authorized service center or yo ur dealer to carry out repair work. Problem Remedy The disc wonâÂÂt play or is automatically ejected after loading. ⢠Make sure the disc is free from dirt and dust and is not damaged (page 50). ⢠Make sure the disc is loaded with the label side face-up and aligned properly in the disc tray guide. ⢠Incompatible region number: If the region number on a DVD-Video disc does not match the number on the player, the disc cannot be used (page 53). In this case the attention sentence âÂÂIncompatible disc region number CanâÂÂt play discâ is displayed on screen. ⢠Condensation inside the player: Allow time for condensation to evaporate. Avoid using the player near an air-conditioning unit. ⢠Disc is loaded upside down: Reload the disc with the label side face up. ⢠A Super VCD that does not conf orm with the IEC standards might not play normally. DVD-Audio playba ck stops. ⢠The disc may have been il legally copied. Picture playback stops and the operation buttons cannot be used. ⢠P re ss ï§ STOP , then start playback again ( ï¤ PLAY ). ⢠Switch the power off once, unplu g from the wall socket, then plug back in and switch on ag ain using the front panel ïµ STAN DBY/ON button. New settings made in the Setup screen menus while a disc is playing are ineffective. ⢠Some settings can be changed while a disc is p laying, but are not effective until the disc is stopped then restarted: Press ï§ STOP , then start playback again ( ï¤ PLA Y ). Settings are canceled. ⢠When the power is cut due to po wer failure or by unplugging the power cord, settings will be canceled: Press ïµ STANDBY/ON on the front panel to turn the player off. Wait for -OFF- to disappear from the display, then unplug the power cord. The remote control doesnâÂÂt seem to work. ⢠The remote control is too far from the player, or the angle with the remote sensor is too wide: Use the remote within its operating range (page 17). ⢠The bat terie s are ex hausted : Put in ne w ones (page 5). DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 54 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
09 55 En No picture/No color. ⢠Incorrect video connection s: Check that connections are correc t and that plugs are inse rted fully . Also check the video cable for damage. ⢠TV/monitor or AV amplifier settings are incorrect: Check the instruction manual of the c onnected equipment. ⢠The video output is set to progre ssive but your TV/mo nitor is not compatible with progressive scan: See page 12 for how to set to Interlace . Screen is stretched or aspect does not change . ⢠The TV Screen setting in the Initial Settings menu is incorrect. See page 51 for how to set it correctly for you r TV/monitor . Picture disturbance during playback or the picture is dark. ⢠This player is compatible with Macro-Vision System copy guard. Some discs include a copy prevention signal, and when this type of disc is played back, stripes etc., may appear on some sections of the picture depending on the TV . This is not a malfunction . ⢠Due to the player âÂÂs copy protecti on circuits, connection of this device through a VCR or an AV selector may prevent recording or cause picture problems. This is not a mal function. ⢠Check whether the TV system is properly set (page 52). No audio , or audio is distorted. ⢠No audio is output during sl ow motion playback or when scanning discs othe r than audio CDs. ⢠Some DVD discs do not output digital audio: Switch your amplifier to the player âÂÂs analog outputs. ⢠Check that the disc is free from dust and dirt, and that it is not damaged (page 50). ⢠Check that all intercon nects are firmly inserted. ⢠Check that the plugs and terminal s are free of dirt, oxide, etc. and clean if necessar y . Also check the cab le for damage. ⢠Make sure the player âÂÂs output i s not connected to the amplifier âÂÂs phono (turntable) inputs. ⢠Check your amplifier/receiver âÂÂs settings (volum e, input function , speaker settings, etc.). The analog audio is OK, but there appears to be no digital audio sign al. ⢠Make sure that the Digi tal Out setting is set to On (page 38). ⢠Check that the Dolby Digital Out , DTS Ou t and MPEG Out settings (page 38) are suitable for your amplifier/receiver â check the instruction manual that came with your amplifier/receiver . ⢠SACDs and some DVD-Audio discs do not output digital audio. Listen through the player âÂÂs analog audio outputs. Noticeable difference in DVD and CD volume. ⢠This is due to differences in the audio format and is not a malfunction . Problem Remedy DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 55 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
09 56 En Cannot play multi- channel audio. ⢠Make su re that Audio O utput Mode is set to 5.1 Channel (page 44). ⢠Check that the Dolby Digital Out , DTS Ou t and MPEG Out settings (page 38) are suitable for your amplifier/receiver â check the instruction manual that came with your amplifier/receiver . ⢠DVD-Audio and SACDs do not outp ut multichannel digital au dio. Listen through the play erâÂÂs analog outputs. ⢠Check that the settings in the Speaker Installation screen are correct (page 49). ⢠Check the audio options avai lable from the disc menu. Cannot listen to high-sampling rate audio through the digital output. ⢠Make su re that Linear PCM Out is set to Down Sample Off (page 38). ⢠As a copy-protection measure, some DVDs do not output 96 kHz audio. In this case, even if s et to Do wn Sample Off , the player automatically outputs the audio at 48 kHz. This is not a malfunction . Cannot output 192 k Hz or 176.4 kHz digital audio. ⢠The player does not output digital audio at these sampling rates. The digital output is automatically downsampled. Cannot outp ut 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz digital audio . ⢠Check that Linear PCM Out is set to Down Sample Off (page 38). ⢠Some discs are digital copy protected and do not output high sampling rate digital audio. In this case the output is automatically downsampled. No DTS audio ou tput. ⢠If this unit is connected to a non-DTS compatible amplifi er or decoder using a digital audio cable, set DTS Out to DTS > PCM (page 38). If you do not do this, nois e will be output when you play a DTS disc. ⢠If this uni t is connected to a DTS -compatible amplif ier or decode r using a digital audio cable, check the amplifier settings, and that the cable is properly connected. Audio mi x does not sound right or sounds in complete (for example, inaudib le dialog). ⢠Make sure that Audio O utput M ode is set to 2 Channel if youâÂÂve connected to the stereo inputs on your amplifier or TV. The audio recorded on a Super VCD disc is n ot output properly. ⢠If the audio is switched to [2] when playing a Super VCD that contains only one stereo soundtrack, there may be no soun d at all. P ress AUDIO to change the soundtrack. CanâÂÂt hear effect of Virtu al Surrou nd. ⢠Virtual Sur round does not wo rk with SACD or DVD-Audio. ⢠The Virtual Sur round effect is only output through the AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) FRONT L/R analog audio outputs. ⢠Make sure that Aud io Output Mode is set to 2 Channel (page 4 4). ⢠The effectiveness of V irtual Su rround varies with the disc. Problem Remedy DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 56 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
09 57 En HDMI troubleshooting Problem Remedy No HDMI audio outp ut. ⢠Check whet her or not HDMI Out is set to Of f (page 38). ⢠This unit has been designed to be compliant with HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Inter face). Dependi ng on the component you have connected, un reliable signal transfers may result. ⢠If the front panel HDMI indicator is lit: â Y ou wonâÂÂt hear any sound from the HDMI output if the source component is only DVI/HDCP-compatible. ⢠If the front panel HDMI indicator is unlit then: â Make sure that youâÂÂve sele cted this player as the HDMI input in the settings for the component youâÂÂre using. Y ou may need to refer to the instruction manual of the component to do this. â Check that the HDMI cable is connected properly and that the cable isnâÂÂt damaged. â Check that components connected using the HDMI interface are switched on and HDMI compatible. No HDMI vi deo output. ⢠Make sure that youâÂÂve s elected this player as the HDMI input in the settings for the component youâÂÂre using. You may need to refer to the instruction manual of the component to do this. ⢠Check that the HDMI cable is connected properly and that the cable isnâÂÂt damaged. ⢠Check that components connected using the HDMI interface are switched on and HDMI compatible. ⢠This unit has been designed to be compliant with HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface). Depending on t he component you have c onnected, using a DVI connection may r esult in unreliable si gnal transfers. ⢠Make sure the resolution on th is player matches that of the component you have connected using HDMI. See HDMI Resolution on page 39 to change the HDMI resolution. See Resetting the output resolution to the default setting with HDMI connection on page 15 if you want to reset the output resolution. No multichannel HDMI audio. ⢠Make sure the HDMI Out s etting i s set to Auto, Au to (DSD) or LPCM (5.1CH) (page 38). See als o About the HDMI audio output settings on page 46 and HDMI output with DVD-Audio and SACD sources on page 47. No sound is output from the AUDIO OUT (5.1ch) jack when connected via HDMI. ⢠Check whether or not HDMI Out is set to Off . (See HDMI Out on page 38.) Componen t Out cannot be set to Interlace. ⢠You can use the Interlace setting if the HDMI Resol ution is set to 720x480i (NTSC)/720x576i (PA L) (page 39). DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 57 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
09 58 En USB troubleshoo ting Note ⢠Static electricity or other exte rnal influences ma y cause malfun c tioning of this unit. In this case, unplug the power cord and th en plug back in. This will usual ly reset the unit for pr oper operation. If this doe s not co rrect the pro blem, please consult your nearest Pionee r service center. Glossary A connected DVI com ponent (with HDCP) doe snâÂÂt work with this player. ⢠This unit has been designed to be compliant with HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface). Depending on t he component you have c onnected, using a DVI connection may r esult in unreliable si gnal transfers. Problem Remedy Problem Remedy USB mass storage device is not recognized by the system. ⢠Make sure you have comple tely inserted the USB connector to this unit. ⢠Check that the memor y format is F A T16 or F A T32. ⢠USB devices with an intern al USB hub are not supported. Files donâÂÂt show up in th e Navigator/Photo Browser. ⢠The files must have the correct file extens ion (page 6). ⢠Make sure the f ile per missi on ha snâÂÂt been restricted (through a password, etc.). CanâÂÂt play WMA or MPEG-4 AAC files. ⢠The f iles were re corded usi ng DRM (digit al rights management) or FairPlay copy-protection. This is not a malfunction . Bonus Group (DVD-Audio only) An âÂÂextraâ group on some DVD- Audio discs that requires a key number to access. Brows able pictures (DVD-Audio only) A feature of some DVD-Audio discs in which the user can browse still pictures recorded on the disc as the audio is played. DRM DRM (digital rights management) copy protection is a technology designed to prevent unauthor ized copyin g by restricting playback, etc. of compressed audio files on devices other than the PC (or other recording equipment) used to record it. F or detailed information , please see the instruction manuals or he lp files that came with your PC and/or software. DSD (Direct Stream Digital) The Digital Audio encoding system found on SACDs, that expresses the audio signals by the pulse density of one bit data. DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 58 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
09 59 En EXIF (Exchan geable Image Fi le) A file format developed by FUJIFILM for digital still cameras. Digital cameras from various manufacturers use this compressed file format which carries date, time and thumbnail in formation, as well as the picture data. HDMI HDMI (High-Definiti on Multimedia Inter face) i s a high-speed digital inter face which has th e capability to support standard, enhanced, or high-defini tion video plus standard to multi-channel surround-sound audio on a single digital connection. HDMI features include uncompressed digital video, a bandwidth of up to 5 gigabytes per second and communication between the AV s o u r c e a n d AV d e v i c e s s u c h as DTVs. ISO 9660 format International standard for the volume and file structure of CD-R OM di scs. MPEG-4 AAC MPEG-4 AAC is a compressed stereo audio file format. F iles are recognized by the extension âÂÂ.m4aâÂÂ. Note that some f iles purchased with copyright protection (such as files from the iT unes store) may not playback. MPEG audio An audio format used on Vid eo CD / Su pe r V C Ds a nd some DVD discs. Packed PCM (DVD-Audio only) A lossless compression system that enables more PCM audio to be stored on a DVD-Audio disc than would otherwise be possible. PBC (PlayBack Control) A system of navigating a Video CD/Sup er VCD through on-scr een menus re corded onto the disc. PCM (Pulse Code Modu lation) Digital audio encoding system found on CDs. Good quality , but requires a lot of data compared to Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG encoded audio. Progressive scan video All the lines that make up a video picture are updated in one pass (compared to interlace which takes two passes to update the whole picture). Super Au dio CD (SACD) Super Audio CD is a high quality audio disc format that can accommodate high sampling rate stereo and multi- channel audio, as well as conventional CD audio all on the same disc. Sampling frequency The rate at which sound is measured to be turned into digital audio data. The higher the rate, the better the sound quality . CD is 44.1 kHz; DVD can be up to 96 kHz. WMV WMV is an acr onym for Windows Media Video and refers to a video compression technology developed by Microsoft Corporation. Files are recognized by the file extension âÂÂ.wmvâÂÂ. DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 59 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
09 60 En Language code list Language (Language code letter), Language cod e Country/Area code list Country/Area, Country/Area co de, Country/Area code letter Japanese (ja), 1001 English (en), 0514 French ( fr), 0618 German (de), 0405 Italian (it), 0920 Spanish (es), 0519 Chinese (zh), 2608 Dutch (nl), 1412 Portuguese (pt), 1620 Swedish (sv), 1922 Russian (ru), 1821 Korean (ko), 1115 Greek (el), 0512 Afar (a a), 0101 Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Afrikaans (af), 0106 Amharic (am), 0113 Arabic (ar), 0118 Assamese (as), 0119 Aymara (ay), 0125 Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Bashkir (ba), 0201 Byelorussian (be), 0205 Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Bihari (bh), 0208 Bislama (bi), 0209 Bengali (bn), 0214 Tibetan (bo ), 0215 Breton (br), 0218 Catalan (ca), 0301 Corsican (co), 0315 Czech (cs), 0319 Welsh (cy), 0325 Danish (da), 0401 Bhutani (dz), 0426 Esperanto (eo), 05 15 Estonian (et), 0520 Basque (eu), 0521 Persian (fa), 0601 Finnish (fi), 0609 Fiji (fj), 0610 Faroese (fo), 0615 Frisian (fy), 0625 Irish (ga), 0701 Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704 Galician (gl), 0712 Guarani (gn), 0714 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Hausa (ha), 0801 Hindi (hi), 0809 Croat ian (hr) , 0818 Hung arian (h u), 0821 Armenian (hy), 0825 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Interlingue (ie), 0905 Inupiak (ik), 0911 Indonesian (in), 0914 Iceland ic (is), 0919 Hebrew (iw), 0923 Yiddish (ji), 1 009 Javane se (j w), 1023 Georgian (ka), 1101 Kazakh (kk), 1111 Greenlandic (kl), 1112 Cambo dian (km) , 1113 Kannada (kn), 1114 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Kirghiz (ky), 1125 Latin (la), 1201 Lingala (ln), 1214 Laothian (lo), 1215 Lithuanian (lt), 1220 Latvian (lv), 1222 Malagasy (mg), 1307 Maori (mi), 1309 Macedonian (mk), 1311 Malayalam (ml), 1312 Mongolian (mn), 1314 Moldavian (mo), 1315 Marathi (mr), 1318 Malay (ms), 1319 Maltese (mt), 1320 Burmes e (my), 1325 Nauru (na), 1401 Nepali (ne), 1405 Norwegian (no), 1415 Occitan (oc), 1503 Oromo (om), 1513 Oriya (or), 1518 Panjabi (pa), 1601 Polish (pl), 1612 Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619 Quechua (qu), 1721 Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813 Kirundi (rn), 1814 Roma nian (ro ), 1815 Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823 Sanskrit (sa), 1901 Sindhi (sd), 1904 Sangho (sg), 1907 Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908 Sinhalese (si), 1909 Slovak (sk), 1911 Slovenian (sl), 1912 Samoan (sm), 1913 Shona (sn), 1914 Somali (so), 1915 Albanian (sq), 19 17 Serbian (sr), 1918 Siswati (ss), 1919 Sesotho (st), 1920 Sundanese (su), 1921 Swahili (sw), 1923 Tamil (ta), 2001 Telugu (te), 2005 Tajik (tg), 2007 Thai (th), 2008 Tigrinya (ti), 2009 Turkmen (tk), 2011 Tagalog (tl), 2012 Setswana (tn), 2014 Tonga (to), 2015 Turkish (tr), 2018 Tsonga (ts ), 2019 Tatar (tt), 2020 Twi (tw), 2023 Ukrainian (uk), 2111 Urdu (ur), 2118 Uzbek (uz), 2126 Vietnamese (vi), 2209 Volapük ( vo), 2215 Wolof (wo), 2315 Xhosa (xh), 2408 Yoruba (yo), 2515 Zulu (zu), 2621 Argentina, 0118 , ar Australia, 0121 , au Austria, 0120 , at Belgium, 0205 , be Brazil, 0218 , br Canada, 0301 , ca Chile, 03 12 , cl China, 0314 , cn Denmark, 0411 , dk Finland , 0609 , fi Franc e, 0618 , fr Germany, 0405 , de Hong Kong, 0811 , hk India, 0914 , in Indonesia, 09 04 , id Italy, 0920 , it Japan, 1016 , jp Republic of Korea, 11 18, kr Malaysia, 1325 , my Mexico, 1324 , mx Netherlands, 1412 , nl New Zealand, 1426 , nz Norway, 1415 , no Pakistan, 1611 , pk Philippines, 1608 , ph Portugal, 1620 , pt Russian Federat ion, 1821 , ru Singapore, 1907 , sg Spain, 0519 , es Sweden, 1905 , se Switzerland, 0308 , ch Taiwan, 2023 , tw Thailand, 2008 , th United Kingdom, 0702 , gb USA, 2119 , us DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 60 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
09 61 En Specific ations General Power requirements . . . . AC 110 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 W Power consumption (standby) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.8 W Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7 kg Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . 420 mm (W) x 49.5 mm (H) x 215.5 mm (D) Operating temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 ðC to 35 ðC Operating humidity . . . . 5 % to 85 % (no condens a tion) Component video output Y (luminance) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 é ) P B (color) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75 é ) P R (color) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75 é ) Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R CA S-video output Y (luminance) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 é ) C (color) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 mVp-p (75 é ) Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-video Video output Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 é ) Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R CA Audio output (1 stereo pair) Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . During audio output 2 0 0m V r m s ( 1k H z , â 2 0d B ) Number of channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA Audio output (multi-channel / L, R, C, SW, SL, SR) Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . During audio output 200 mVrms (1 kHz, âÂÂ20 dB) Number of channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA HDMI output HDMI output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 pin Digital audio c haracteristics Frequency response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Hz to 44 kHz S/N ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 dB Dynamic range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 dB Total harmonic distort ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 .0023 % Wow and flutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L imit of measurement (ñ0.001 % W. PEAK) or lower Digital output s Coaxial digital output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R CA Optical digital output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optical Accessorie s Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 AA/R6P dry cell batteri es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Audio/video cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Power cable Central Amer ican, South American, and Taiwan model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Front panel button names stic ker (Taiwan mode ls only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Remote control overlay (Taiw an mode ls only ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Operating instructions The specifica tions an d design o f this product a re subject to change without noti ce, due to im provemen t. DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 61 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
<VRB1500-A> Printed in Thailand <08F00001> Published b y Pioneer Cor poration. Cop yr ight é 2008 Pioneer Cor poration. All rights reser ved. PIONEER CORPORA TION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, T okyo 153-8654, J apan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P .O . BO X 1540, Long Beach, Calif or nia 90801-1540, U .S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANAD A, INC. 300 Allstate P arkway , Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411 PIONEER EUROPE NV Hav en 1087, K eetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIA CENTRE PTE. L TD . 253 Ale xandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS A USTRALIA PTY . L TD . 178-184 Boundar y Road, Braeside, Victor ia 3195, Austr alia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V . Blvd.Manuel A vila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Me xico ,D .F . 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 K002_B_En DV610AV_IBD_EN.b ook 64 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼ ï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂ ï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂ æÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ